Nikon Webcam D300s User Manual
DIGITAL CAMERA  
User's Manual  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Find It  
Find what you’re looking for from:  
0 x–xvii  
The Table of Contents  
Find items by function or menu name.  
➜
➜
i
iv–ix  
The Q&A Index  
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find  
it from the “question and answer” index.  
0
i
398–403  
The Index  
Search by key word.  
0
➜
i
i
378–384  
Error Messages  
0
➜
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the  
solution here.  
373–377  
Troubleshooting  
0
➜
i
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.  
A For Your Safety  
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety  
instructions in “For Your Safety” (0 xviii–xx).  
Help  
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other  
topics. See page 21 for details.  
Digitutor  
Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available  
from the following website:  
http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Package Contents  
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.  
Memory cards are sold separately.  
• D300S digital camera • Body cap  
• BM-8 monitor  
cover (0 16)  
•
BS-1  
(0 3)  
(0 26, 355)  
accessory  
shoe cover  
(0 347)  
• EN-EL3e  
• MH-18a quick  
• DK-5 eyepiece cap  
(0 91, 191)  
rechargeable Li-ion  
charger with power  
battery with terminal cable (0 22)  
cover (0 22, 24)  
•
DK-23 rubber eyecup  
(0 91, 191)  
• EG-D2 audio/video  
cable (0 239)  
• UC-E4 USB cable  
(0 224, 229)  
• AN-DC4 strap  
• Warranty  
• Software Suite CD-ROM  
• User’s Manual (this guide)  
• Quick Guide  
• Registration card  
(U. S. A. only)  
• Software Installation Guide  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following  
symbols and conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before  
use to prevent damage to the camera.  
D
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before  
using the camera.  
A
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.  
0
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor  
are shown in bold  
.
A Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple  
Inc. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered  
trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries. CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk  
Corporation. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD Card Association.  
PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks. HDMI, the HDMI logo  
and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in  
this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon  
product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  
holders.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
iv  
x
Q&A Index  
Table of Contents  
Introduction  
X
s
x
y
d
N
k
S
Z
r
J
l
t
I
Q
U
n
1
Tutorial  
17  
47  
57  
67  
73  
85  
95  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
Image Recording Options  
Focus  
Release Mode  
ISO Sensitivity  
Exposure  
0 101  
0 133  
0 153  
0 169  
0 181  
0 203  
0 223  
0 243  
0 339  
White Balance  
Image Enhancement  
Flash Photography  
Other Shooting Options  
More About Playback  
Connections  
Menu Guide  
Technical Notes  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q&A Index  
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer”  
index.  
❚❚New Features  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I take high-quality NEF (RAW)  
photos?  
14-bit NEF (RAW)  
70  
Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder?  
How do I shoot movies?  
Live view  
Movies  
47  
57  
Primary slot,  
secondary slot  
Picture Controls  
How do I record photographs using two  
memory cards?  
Can I control how photos are processed?  
How do I preserve details in shadows  
and highlights?  
72  
154  
164  
Active D-Lighting  
How do I focus on erratically moving  
subjects?  
How do I tell if the camera is level?  
Can I adjust focus separately for  
different lenses?  
3D-tracking  
Virtual horizon  
AF fine tune  
265  
311  
312  
Cleaning the low-pass  
filter  
How do I remove dust from the low-pass  
filter protecting the image sensor?  
358  
❚❚Camera Setup  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I focus the viewfinder?  
Viewfinder focus  
36  
How do I keep the monitor from turning  
off?  
How do I keep the shutter speed and  
aperture displays from turning off?  
Monitor off delay  
Auto meter off  
274  
39,  
273  
Can I display a framing grid in the  
viewfinder?  
Viewfinder grid display 275  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I set the clock?  
How do I set the clock for daylight  
savings time?  
How do I change time zones when I  
travel?  
29,  
302  
Time zone and date  
How do I adjust monitor brightness for  
menus or playback?  
LCD brightness  
301  
How do I change the self-timer delay?  
How do I turn the speaker off?  
Can I reverse the exposure indicator?  
Can I display the menus in a different  
language?  
Self-timer  
Beep  
Reverse indicators  
273  
275  
299  
28,  
Language  
303  
Can I save menu settings for use on a  
different D300S camera?  
How do I restore default settings?  
How do I restore shooting menu  
defaults?  
Save/load settings  
Two-button reset  
310  
182  
256  
Reset shooting menu  
How do I restore Custom Setting  
defaults?  
Reset custom settings  
262  
❚❚Menus and Displays  
Question  
Key phrase  
Help  
0
How do I get more information on a  
menu?  
21  
How do I use the menus?  
Can I get quick access to frequently-used  
settings?  
Using the menus  
My Menu  
18  
333  
Can I get quick access to recently-used  
settings?  
Recent settings  
337  
What do these indicators mean?  
What information is in the information  
display?  
Viewfinder, control  
panel, information  
display  
8, 10,  
12  
Error messages and  
displays  
What does this warning mean?  
378  
37  
How much charge does the battery have  
left?  
Battery level  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I get more information about  
the battery?  
Battery info  
307  
How do I keep the file number from  
being reset when I insert a new memory  
card?  
File number sequence 277  
How do I reset file numbering to 1?  
How do I clean the camera or lens?  
Cleaning the camera  
357  
❚❚Taking Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
0
How many more shots can I take with  
this card?  
38  
How do I take bigger photographs?  
How can I get more photos on the  
memory card?  
Image quality and size 68, 71  
How do I make an NEF (RAW) copy of the  
next photo?  
+NEF (RAW)  
294  
Can I control how the camera focuses?  
Can I choose the focus point?  
Autofocus  
Focus point  
74  
78  
How do I take a lot of photographs  
quickly?  
Release mode  
Shooting speed  
Self-timer mode  
ISO sensitivity  
86  
89,  
276  
Can I change the frame advance rate?  
How do I take pictures with the self-  
timer?  
Can I take pictures under low light  
without the flash?  
91  
96  
ISO sensitivity auto  
control  
Can the ISO sensitivity I choose be  
adjusted to ensure optimal exposure?  
98  
Exposure mode f  
(shutter-priority auto)  
How do I freeze or blur moving objects?  
108  
How do I blur background details or  
keep both foreground and background  
in focus?  
Exposure mode g  
(aperture-priority auto)  
109  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Question  
Key phrase  
Exposure mode h  
(manual)  
0
Can I set both shutter speed and  
aperture manually?  
111  
Can I make photos brighter or darker?  
How do I make a time exposure?  
Can I vary exposure or flash level  
automatically over a series of photos?  
Can I create multiple copies of a photo  
using different white balance settings?  
Can I vary Active D-Lighting  
automatically over a series of photos?  
Exposure compensation 118  
Long time-exposures  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing  
114  
120,  
289  
125,  
289  
129,  
289  
133  
White balance  
bracketing  
ADL bracketing  
White balance  
How do I adjust white balance?  
Can I take pictures with a flash?  
Flash photography, flash 171  
mode, red-eye  
reduction  
How can I reduce “red-eye”?  
175  
How can I record multiple shots as a  
single photograph?  
Multiple exposure  
184  
Fine tune optimal  
exposure  
Exposure delay mode  
Can I pick the standard exposure level?  
How can I reduce blur?  
272  
278  
281  
Can the flash be used at shutter speeds  
Flash sync speed  
faster than 1/250 s?  
❚❚Viewing Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
Can I view my photographs on the  
camera?  
Camera playback  
204  
Can I view more information about  
photos?  
Photo info  
207  
209,  
247  
Why do parts of my photos blink?  
Photo info, highlights  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Question  
Key phrase  
Deleting individual  
photos  
0
How do I get rid of an unwanted photo?  
220  
Can I delete several photos at once?  
Can I zoom in on pictures?  
Delete  
Playback zoom  
221  
218  
Can I protect photos from accidental  
deletion?  
Protect  
219  
Can I hide selected photos?  
How do I tell if parts of my photos may  
be overexposed?  
Hide image  
Display mode:  
highlights  
245  
209,  
247  
208,  
247  
251  
Display mode: focus  
point  
How do I tell where the camera focused?  
Can I view photos as they are taken?  
Image review  
Is there an automatic playback (“slide  
show”) option?  
Slide show  
252  
❚❚Retouching Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
D-Lighting  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
0
How do I bring out details in shadows?  
Can I get rid of red eye?  
Can I crop photographs on the camera?  
319  
320  
321  
Can I create a monochrome copy of a  
photograph?  
Monochrome  
322  
Filter effects,  
Color balance  
322,  
323  
Can I create a copy with different colors?  
Can I use the camera to create JPEG  
copies of NEF (RAW) photographs?  
Can I overlay two NEF (RAW) photos to  
make a single image?  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Image overlay  
327  
324  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
Can I view my photos on TV?  
Can I view my photos in High Definition?  
Television playback  
HDMI  
239  
241  
Connecting to a  
computer  
How do I copy photos to my computer?  
224  
How do I print photographs?  
Printing photographs  
Printing via USB  
Time stamp  
228  
229  
231  
237  
Can I print photos without a computer?  
Can I print the date on my photographs?  
How do I order professional prints?  
Print set (DPOF)  
❚❚Optional Accessories  
Question  
Key phrase  
Approved memory  
cards  
0
What memory cards can I use?  
What lenses can I use?  
What optional flash units (Speedlights)  
can I use?  
What software is available for my  
camera?  
What AC adapters, battery packs,  
remote cords, and viewfinder  
accessories are available for my  
camera?  
393  
340  
347  
Compatible lenses  
Optional flash units  
Other accessories  
355  
352  
Other accessories  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Q&A Index ................................................................................................iv  
For Your Safety .................................................................................. xviii  
Notices.....................................................................................................xxi  
Introduction  
1
Overview....................................................................................................2  
Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................3  
Camera Body.......................................................................................3  
The Control Panel..............................................................................8  
The Viewfinder Display..................................................................10  
The Information Display................................................................12  
The BM-8 Monitor Cover...............................................................16  
Tutorial  
17  
Camera Menus...................................................................................... 18  
Using Camera Menus .....................................................................19  
Help ......................................................................................................21  
First Steps ............................................................................................... 22  
Charge the Battery..........................................................................22  
Insert the Battery .............................................................................24  
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................26  
Basic Setup.........................................................................................28  
Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................31  
Format the Memory Card .............................................................34  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................36  
Basic Photography and Playback................................................... 37  
Turn the Camera On .......................................................................37  
Adjust Camera Settings.................................................................40  
Ready the Camera ...........................................................................42  
Focus and Shoot ..............................................................................43  
Viewing Photographs ....................................................................45  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs............................................. 46  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)  
47  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor.......................................... 48  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
57  
Recording Movies................................................................................ 58  
Viewing Movies.................................................................................... 63  
Editing Movies...................................................................................... 64  
Image Recording Options  
67  
Image Quality........................................................................................ 68  
Image Size.............................................................................................. 71  
Using Two Memory Cards ................................................................ 72  
Focus  
73  
Focus Mode ........................................................................................... 74  
AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 76  
Focus Point Selection......................................................................... 78  
Focus Lock.............................................................................................. 80  
Manual Focus........................................................................................ 83  
Release Mode  
85  
Choosing a Release Mode ................................................................ 86  
Continuous Mode................................................................................ 88  
Self-Timer Mode................................................................................... 91  
Mirror up Mode .................................................................................... 93  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ISO Sensitivity  
95  
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually................................................ 96  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ............................................................ 98  
Exposure  
101  
Metering ...............................................................................................102  
Exposure Mode...................................................................................104  
e: Programmed Auto .................................................................. 106  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. 108  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... 109  
h: Manual......................................................................................... 111  
Long Time-Exposures.......................................................................114  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................116  
Exposure Compensation.................................................................118  
Bracketing ............................................................................................120  
White Balance  
133  
White Balance Options ....................................................................134  
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................137  
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................141  
Preset Manual .....................................................................................142  
Image Enhancement  
153  
Picture Controls..................................................................................154  
Selecting a Picture Control........................................................ 154  
Creating Custom Picture Controls.......................................... 160  
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................164  
Color Space..........................................................................................166  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Photography  
169  
The Built-in Flash ...............................................................................170  
Using the Built-in Flash....................................................................171  
Flash Modes.........................................................................................175  
Flash Compensation.........................................................................177  
FV Lock ..................................................................................................178  
Other Shooting Options  
181  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................182  
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................184  
Interval Timer Photography ..........................................................189  
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................195  
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................198  
More About Playback  
203  
Full-Frame Playback .........................................................................204  
Photo Information.............................................................................207  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback .....................216  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................218  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................219  
Deleting Photographs .....................................................................220  
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback .....................................220  
The Playback Menu ......................................................................221  
Connections  
223  
Connecting to a Computer............................................................224  
Direct USB Connection ...............................................................225  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks .............................................227  
Printing Photographs.......................................................................228  
Connecting the Printer ...............................................................229  
Printing Pictures One at a Time ...............................................230  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Multiple Pictures.......................................................... 233  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set ................................. 237  
Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................239  
Standard Definition Devices..................................................... 239  
High-Definition Devices............................................................. 241  
Menu Guide  
243  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...............................244  
Playback Folder......................................................................... 245  
Hide Image................................................................................. 245  
Display Mode............................................................................. 247  
Copy Image(s) ........................................................................... 248  
Image Review............................................................................ 251  
After Delete................................................................................ 251  
Rotate Tall................................................................................... 251  
Slide Show.................................................................................. 252  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...............................253  
Shooting Menu Bank .............................................................. 254  
Reset Shooting Menu............................................................. 256  
Active Folder.............................................................................. 256  
File Naming................................................................................ 258  
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction).......... 258  
High ISO NR................................................................................ 259  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............260  
B: Custom Setting Bank........................................................ 262  
A: Reset Custom Settings..................................................... 262  
a: Autofocus.................................................................................... 263  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection..................................................... 263  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection..................................................... 264  
a3: Dynamic AF Area............................................................... 264  
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On ....................................... 266  
a5: AF Activation ...................................................................... 266  
a6: AF Point Illumination....................................................... 266  
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around ............................................. 267  
a8: AF Point Selection............................................................. 267  
a9: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator ......................................... 268  
a10: AF-On for MB-D10 .......................................................... 269  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................270  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value ..............................................270  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl. ..........................................270  
b3: Exp Comp/Fine Tune .......................................................270  
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................271  
b5: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................272  
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure.........................................272  
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................273  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .........................................273  
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay........................................................273  
c3: Self-Timer..............................................................................273  
c4: Monitor off Delay...............................................................274  
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................275  
d1: Beep .......................................................................................275  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ..................................................275  
d3: Viewfinder Warning Display..........................................275  
d4: Screen Tips...........................................................................276  
d5: CL Mode Shooting Speed ..............................................276  
d6: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................276  
d7: File Number Sequence....................................................277  
d8: Information Display..........................................................278  
d9: LCD Illumination................................................................278  
d10: Exposure Delay Mode ...................................................278  
d11: MB-D10 Battery Type ....................................................279  
d12: Battery Order....................................................................280  
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................281  
e1: Flash Sync Speed...............................................................281  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................282  
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash...........................................283  
e4: Modeling Flash...................................................................289  
e5: Auto Bracketing Set..........................................................289  
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M).............................................290  
e7: Bracketing Order................................................................290  
f: Controls.........................................................................................291  
f1: D Switch................................................................................291  
f2: Multi Selector Center Button..........................................291  
f3: Multi Selector.......................................................................292  
f4: Photo Info/Playback ..........................................................292  
f5: Assign Fn Button.................................................................292  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f6: Assign Preview Button ..................................................... 296  
f7: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button ................................................. 296  
f8: Customize Command Dials............................................ 297  
f9: Release Button to Use Dial.............................................. 298  
f10: No Memory Card?............................................................ 299  
f11: Reverse Indicators ........................................................... 299  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................300  
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 301  
LCD Brightness.......................................................................... 301  
Video Mode................................................................................ 301  
HDMI............................................................................................. 302  
Time Zone and Date ............................................................... 302  
Language.................................................................................... 303  
Image Comment ...................................................................... 303  
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 304  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 305  
Battery Info................................................................................. 307  
Wireless Transmitter ............................................................... 308  
Image Authentication ............................................................ 308  
Copyright Information ........................................................... 309  
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 310  
Virtual Horizon .......................................................................... 311  
AF Fine Tune.............................................................................. 312  
Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................ 313  
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 314  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............315  
D-Lighting................................................................................... 319  
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 320  
Trim............................................................................................... 321  
Monochrome............................................................................. 322  
Filter Effects................................................................................ 322  
Color Balance............................................................................. 323  
Image Overlay ........................................................................... 324  
NEF (RAW) Processing ............................................................ 327  
Resize............................................................................................ 329  
Side-by-Side Comparison ..................................................... 331  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu......................................333  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
339  
Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................340  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)..............................................347  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ..........................348  
Other Accessories..............................................................................352  
Caring for the Camera......................................................................357  
Storage..............................................................................................357  
Cleaning ...........................................................................................357  
The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................358  
“Clean Now” ...............................................................................358  
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..............................................359  
Manual Cleaning.......................................................................361  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................364  
Defaults.................................................................................................368  
Exposure Program.............................................................................372  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................373  
Error Messages ...................................................................................378  
Specifications......................................................................................385  
Approved Memory Cards ...............................................................393  
Memory Card Capacity....................................................................394  
Battery Life...........................................................................................396  
Index.......................................................................................................398  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to  
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using  
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use  
the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the  
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all  
warnings before using this Nikon product.  
A
❚❚WARNINGS  
A Keep the sun out of the frame  
Keep the sun well out of the frame  
when shooting backlit subjects.  
Sunlight focused into the camera  
when the sun is in or close to the  
frame could cause a fire.  
A Turn off immediately in the event of  
malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an  
unusual smell coming from the  
equipment or AC adapter  
(available separately), unplug the  
AC adapter and remove the  
battery immediately, taking care  
to avoid burns. Continued  
operation could result in injury.  
After removing the battery, take  
the equipment to a Nikon-  
authorized service center for  
inspection.  
A Do not look at the sun through the  
viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong  
light source through the  
viewfinder could cause  
permanent visual impairment.  
A Using the viewfinder diopter control  
When operating the viewfinder  
diopter control with your eye to  
the viewfinder, care should be  
taken not to put your finger in  
your eye accidentally.  
A Do not disassemble  
Touching the product’s internal  
parts could result in injury. In the  
event of malfunction, the product  
should be repaired only by a  
qualified technician. Should the  
product break open as the result  
of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter  
and then take the product to a  
Nikon-authorized service center  
for inspection.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Do not use in the presence of flammable  
gas  
• Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
• Batteries are prone to leakage  
when fully discharged. To avoid  
damage to the product, be sure to  
remove the battery when no  
charge remains.  
Do not use electronic equipment  
in the presence of flammable gas,  
as this could result in explosion or  
fire.  
A Keep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in injury.  
A Do not place the strap around the neck of  
an infant or child  
• When the battery is not in use,  
attach the terminal cover and  
store in a cool, dry place.  
Placing the camera strap around  
the neck of an infant or child  
could result in strangulation.  
• The battery may be hot  
immediately after use or when the  
product has been used on battery  
power for an extended period.  
Before removing the battery turn  
the camera off and allow the  
battery to cool.  
• Discontinue use immediately  
should you notice any changes in  
the battery, such as discoloration  
or deformation.  
A Observe proper precautions when  
handling batteries  
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when  
handling batteries for use in this  
product:  
• Use only batteries approved for  
use in this equipment.  
• Do not short or disassemble the  
battery.  
• Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are  
using an AC adapter, be sure it is  
unplugged.  
• Do not attempt to insert the  
battery upside down or  
backwards.  
• Do not expose the battery to  
flame or to excessive heat.  
• Do not immerse in or expose to  
water.  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Observe proper precautions when  
handling the quick charger  
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or  
electric shock.  
• Dust on or near the metal parts of  
the plug should be removed with  
a dry cloth. Continued use could  
result in fire.  
• Do not handle the power cable or  
go near the charger during  
thunderstorms. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in  
electric shock.  
A Use appropriate cables  
When connecting cables to the  
input and output jacks, use only  
the cables provided or sold by  
Nikon for the purpose to maintain  
compliance with product  
regulations.  
A CD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played  
back on audio CD equipment.  
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD  
player could cause hearing loss or  
damage the equipment.  
• Do not damage, modify, or  
forcibly tug or bend the power  
cable. Do not place it under  
heavy objects or expose it to heat  
or flame. Should the insulation be  
damaged and the wires become  
exposed, take the power cable to  
a Nikon-authorized service  
representative for inspection.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
• Do not handle the plug or charger  
with wet hands. Failure to  
observe this precaution could  
result in electric shock.  
• Do not use with travel converters  
or adapters designed to convert  
from one voltage to another or  
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure  
to observe this precaution could  
damage the product or cause  
overheating or fire.  
A Observe caution when using the flash  
• Using the camera with the flash in  
close contact with the skin or  
other objects could cause burns.  
• Using the flash close to the  
subject’s eyes could cause  
temporary visual impairment.  
Particular care should be  
observed when photographing  
infants, when the flash should be  
no less than one meter (39 in.)  
from the subject.  
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
Should the monitor break, care  
should be taken to avoid injury  
due to broken glass and to  
prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or  
entering the eyes or mouth.  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any  
product may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,  
or translated into any language in any  
form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior  
written permission.  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and  
software described in these manuals at  
any time and without prior notice.  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
• While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring  
any errors or omissions to the attention  
of the Nikon representative in your area  
(address provided separately).  
Notices for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est  
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies  
with Canadian ICES-003.  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF  
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that  
this product is to be  
collected separately.  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery is  
to be collected separately.  
The following apply only to  
users in European countries:  
• This product is designated  
for separate collection at an  
appropriate collection point. Do not  
dispose of as household waste.  
• For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
The following apply only to  
users in European countries:  
• All batteries, whether marked with this  
symbol or not, are designated for  
separate collection at an appropriate  
collection point. Do not dispose of as  
household waste.  
• For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
The Battery Charger  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the  
proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be  
correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
D300S  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
The FCC requires the user be notified  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
that any changes or modifications made  
and used in accordance with the  
to this device that are not expressly  
instructions, may cause harmful  
approved by Nikon Corporation may  
interference to radio communications.  
void the user’s authority to operate the  
However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular  
equipment.  
installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet  
on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided  
by Nikon for your equipment. Using  
other interface cables may exceed the  
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
may expose you to lead, a chemical known  
to the State of California to cause birth  
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash  
hands after handling.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage  
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can  
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially  
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image  
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another  
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and  
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for  
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for  
preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying  
data storage devices.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or  
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be  
punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
reproduced  
The government has issued cautions  
on copies or reproductions of  
Do not copy or reproduce paper  
money, coins, securities, government  
bonds, or local government bonds,  
even if such copies or reproductions  
are stamped “Sample.”  
securities issued by private companies  
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,  
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon  
tickets, except when a minimum of  
necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do  
not copy or reproduce passports  
issued by the government, licenses  
issued by public agencies and private  
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as  
passes and meal coupons.  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is  
prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused  
postage stamps or post cards issued by  
the government is prohibited.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of  
copyrighted creative works such as  
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,  
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and  
photographs is governed by national  
and international copyright laws. Do  
not use this product for the purpose of  
making illegal copies or to infringe  
copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of  
certified documents stipulated by law  
is prohibited.  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex  
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery  
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon  
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to  
operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the  
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party  
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal  
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera  
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized  
Nikon dealer.  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or  
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the  
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for  
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing  
product support and education, continually-updated information is  
available on-line at the following sites:  
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,  
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice  
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be  
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following  
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X
Introduction  
X
This chapter covers information you will need to know before  
using the camera, including the names of camera parts.  
Overview..................................................................................... 2  
Getting to Know the Camera .................................................. 3  
Camera Body................................................................................................3  
The Control Panel .......................................................................................8  
The Viewfinder Display.......................................................................... 10  
The Information Display........................................................................ 12  
The BM-8 Monitor Cover....................................................................... 16  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview  
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR)  
digital camera. Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly  
to get the most from the camera, and keep them where they will  
be read by all those who use the product.  
X
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with  
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within  
its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON  
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON  
WARRANTY.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon  
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a  
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,  
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are  
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any  
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional  
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
A Camera Settings  
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls  
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and  
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.  
Camera Body  
X
1
9
10  
11  
2
3
4
5
6
12  
13  
14  
15  
7
8
1 Release mode dial.......................... 87 8 BS-1 accessory shoe cover .........347  
2 Release mode dial  
9 Power switch.............................37, 39  
10 Shutter-release button ...........43, 44  
11 E (exposure compensation)  
button.............................................118  
Two-button reset button ...........182  
12 I (exposure mode)  
lock release...................................... 87  
3 QUAL (image quality/size)  
button.........................................69, 71  
Two-button reset button ........... 182  
4 Eyelet for camera strap  
5 WB (white balance)  
button........................... 135, 140, 141  
button.............................................105  
Q (format) button........................ 34  
6 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button .......... 96 13 Eyelet for camera strap  
7 Accessory shoe  
14 Focal plane mark (E)................... 84  
(for optional flash unit)............... 347  
15 Control panel......................................8  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Body (Continued)  
1
2
3
4
7
8
X
5
6
9
10  
11  
A/V  
OUT  
MIC  
12  
13  
15  
16  
14  
17  
18  
1 Built-in flash .................................. 171 10 A/V connector...............................239  
2 Flash pop-up button ................... 171 11 HDMI mini-pin connector ..........241  
3 M (flash mode) button................. 171 12 Connector for external  
Y (flash compensation)  
button............................................. 177  
4 Built-in microphone ................59, 62  
microphone...............................58, 62  
13 DC-IN connector for optional AC  
adapter EH-5a or EH-5 ................352  
5 Flash sync terminal cover........... 347 14 USB connector .....................225, 229  
6 Ten-pin remote terminal  
15 Lens release button ....................... 27  
16 Focus-mode selector...............74, 83  
17 Meter coupling lever...................387  
18 Mirror ....................................... 93, 361  
cover....................................... 198, 356  
7 Flash sync terminal...................... 347  
8 Ten-pin remote terminal ... 198, 356  
9
Connector cover .... 225, 229, 239, 241  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
9
1
2
10  
X
3
4
5
6
11  
7
12  
1 AF-assist illuminator.................... 268 6 Battery-chamber cover latch....... 24  
Self-timer lamp............................... 92  
Red-eye reduction lamp............. 175  
2 Sub-command dial...................... 297  
3 Depth-of-field preview  
button.................................... 105, 296  
4 Fn button.... 121, 125, 129, 179, 292  
5 Battery-chamber cover................. 24  
7 Contact cover for optional MB-D10  
battery pack ..................................352  
8 CPU contacts  
9 Mounting index.............................. 27  
10 Lens mount................................27, 84  
11 Tripod socket  
12 Body cap.................................. 26, 355  
D The Microphone and Speaker  
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic  
devices. Failure to observe this precaution could affect audio data  
recorded with the camera.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Body (Continued)  
1
2
X
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1 Viewfinder eyepiece...................... 36 7 L (protect) button ...................219  
? (help) button ................................ 21  
8 W (thumbnail/playback  
zoom out) button.........................216  
9 X (playback zoom in)  
button.............................................218  
2 DK-23 rubber eyecup ........... 91, 191  
3 O (delete) button .................. 46, 220  
Q (format) button........................ 34  
4 K (playback) button ........... 45, 204  
5 Monitor..............................45, 47, 204  
6 G (menu) button ............. 18, 243  
10 J (OK) button................................. 19  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
X
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1 Diopter adjustment control......... 36 8 Memory card slot cover................ 31  
2 Metering selector......................... 103 9 Focus selector lock......................... 78  
3 A (AE/AF lock)  
10 Memory card access lamp .....33, 44  
11 AF-area mode selector.................. 76  
12 Speaker.......................................63, 64  
13 R (info) button .............................. 12  
14 a (live view) button........49, 52, 58  
button................................80, 81, 296  
4 B (AF-ON) button....... 50, 59, 75  
5 Main command dial .................... 297  
6 Multi selector .................................. 19  
7 Multi selector center  
button......................... 19, 59, 63, 291  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Control Panel  
1
2
3
4
15  
14  
13  
5
6
12  
11  
X
7
8
9
10  
Color temperature indicator......... 141  
White balance ...................................135  
1
2
10  
11  
Shutter speed .......................... 108, 112  
Exposure compensation value..... 118  
Flash compensation value............. 177  
ISO sensitivity ......................................96  
White balance fine-tuning ............ 140  
Color temperature........................... 141  
White balance preset number...... 151  
Number of shots in exposure, flash,  
or white balance bracketing  
sequence .................................. 121, 125  
Number of intervals for  
interval timer photography .......... 192  
Focal length (non-CPU lenses)..... 197  
Flash sync indicator......................... 281  
“K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures)..................38  
Exposure indicator...........................113  
Exposure compensation  
indicator .............................................118  
Bracketing progress indicator:  
Exposure and flash bracketing...121  
WB bracketing................................125  
ADL bracketing ..............................129  
PC connection indicator.................224  
Flash mode ........................................171  
12  
13  
14  
Aperture (f-number)................109, 112  
Aperture (number of stops) ...110, 343  
Bracketing increment.............122, 126  
Number of shots in ADL bracketing  
sequence............................................129  
Number of shots per interval ........192  
Maximum aperture  
(non-CPU lenses)..............................197  
PC mode indicator ...........................224  
Aperture stop indicator .........110,343  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Flexible program indicator............ 107  
Exposure mode ................................ 104  
Image size.............................................71  
Image quality ......................................69  
Auto-area AF indicator......................77  
AF-area mode indicator ....................77  
3D-tracking indicator ...............77, 265  
White balance fine-tuning  
15  
9
indicator............................................. 140  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
29  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
X
21  
22  
Flash compensation indicator...... 177  
Number of exposures remaining ... 38  
Number of shots remaining before  
memory buffer fills ............................ 89  
Capture mode indicator .................224  
Preset white balance  
recording indicator ..........................144  
Manual lens number .......................197  
ISO sensitivity indicator.................... 96  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator..........99  
Exposure and flash  
16  
17  
26  
Exposure compensation  
indicator............................................. 118  
FV lock indicator .............................. 179  
18  
19  
CompactFlash (CF) card  
indicator................................................32  
Secure Digital (SD) card  
indicator................................................32  
“Clock not set” indicator ..........30, 378  
20  
27  
28  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 186  
“Beep” indicator............................... 275  
MB-D10 battery indicator.............. 280  
Battery indicator.................................37  
bracketing indicator ........................121  
WB bracketing indicator.................125  
ADL bracketing indicator ...............129  
GPS connection indicator...............200  
29  
30  
Interval timer indicator...................192  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Viewfinder Display  
1
2
X
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
19  
11 12  
20  
14  
15  
13  
16  
18  
21  
17  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Framing grid (displayed  
14 Number of exposures  
when On is selected for Custom  
Setting d2) ..................................... 275  
2 Focus points ........................... 78, 267  
3 AF area brackets .......................36, 52  
4 Battery indicator.................... 37, 275  
(display can be turned off with  
remaining......................................... 38  
Number of shots remaining before  
memory buffer fills ..................43, 89  
White balance recording  
indicator .........................................144  
Exposure compensation  
value................................................118  
Flash compensation value .........177  
15 Flash-ready indicator...................171  
16 FV lock indicator...........................179  
17 Flash sync indicator .....................281  
18 Aperture stop indicator ..............110  
19 Exposure indicator.......................113  
Exposure compensation  
display.............................................118  
20 Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator ........................................... 99  
21 “K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
Custom Setting d3)  
X
5 Focus indicator .........................43, 84  
6 Metering......................................... 102  
7 Autoexposure (AE) lock .............. 116  
8 Shutter speed....................... 108, 112  
9 Aperture (f-number) .......... 109, 112  
Aperture (number of stops) ...... 110  
10 Exposure mode............................. 104  
11 Flash compensation  
indicator ......................................... 177  
12 Exposure compensation  
indicator ......................................... 118  
13 ISO sensitivity.................................. 96  
exposures)........................................ 38  
D No Battery  
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the  
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a  
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-  
charged battery is inserted.  
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays  
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with  
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low  
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Information Display  
Shooting information, including shutter  
speed, aperture, the number of exposures  
remaining, buffer capacity, and AF-area  
mode, is displayed in the monitor when the  
R button is pressed.  
R button  
X
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the  
R
button twice  
more or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off  
automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds. The  
information display can be restored by pressing the  
R
button.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see  
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 274). For information on  
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see  
Custom Setting d8 (Information display, 0 278).  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 2 3  
4
56  
7
21  
8
20  
19  
9
10  
11  
18  
12  
X
17  
16 15 14  
13  
Exposure mode ................................ 104  
Flexible program indicator............ 107  
Flash sync indicator......................... 281  
“K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures)............................................ 38  
Number of exposures  
remaining ............................................ 38  
Manual lens number .......................197  
Fn button assignment .....................292  
AE-L/AF-L button assignment .........296  
Picture Control indicator ................155  
1
2
3
4
11  
12  
Shutter speed .......................... 108, 111  
Exposure compensation value..... 118  
Flash compensation value............. 177  
Number of shots in exposure, flash,  
or white balance bracketing  
sequence .................................. 121, 125  
Focal length (non-CPU lenses)..... 197  
Color temperature........................... 141  
Color temperature indicator......... 141  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Long exposure noise reduction  
indicator .............................................258  
Custom settings bank .....................262  
5
6
7
17  
18  
Aperture stop indicator.................. 110  
Auto-area AF indicator......................77  
Focus points indicator....................... 78  
AF-area mode indicator.................... 77  
3D-tracking indicator............... 77, 265  
Image quality ......................................68  
Primary/secondary slot.....................72  
Image size ............................................ 71  
Aperture (f-number).............. 109, 111  
Aperture (number of stops).......... 110  
Bracketing increment............ 122, 126  
Number of shots in ADL bracketing  
sequence ........................................... 129  
Maximum aperture  
19  
20  
21  
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 197  
Flash mode........................................ 171  
Exposure indicator...........................113  
Exposure compensation  
indicator .............................................118  
Bracketing progress indicator:  
Exposure and flash bracketing...121  
WB bracketing................................125  
ADL bracketing ..............................129  
8
9
ISO sensitivity indicator ....................96  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ..........99  
White balance................................... 134  
White balance fine-tuning  
10  
indicator............................................. 140  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Information Display (Continued)  
22 23 24 25  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
X
36  
Exposure compensation  
display ................................................ 118  
Flash compensation  
indicator............................................. 177  
Interval timer indicator .................. 192  
35 34 33  
32  
Depth-of-field preview button  
22  
23  
32  
assignment ........................................296  
Color space indicator.......................166  
33  
34  
35  
Active D-Lighting indicator ...........165  
24  
25  
26  
27  
High ISO noise reduction  
Eye-Fi connection indicator .......... 313  
GPS connection indicator.............. 200  
indicator .............................................259  
Shooting menu bank ......................254  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
Exposure and flash  
Multiple exposure indicator ..........186  
ADL bracketing amount .................130  
Copyright information ....................309  
“Clock not set” indicator.......... 30, 378  
Image comment indicator .............303  
bracketing indicator ....................... 121  
WB bracketing indicator ................ 125  
ADL bracketing indicator............... 129  
Metering ............................................ 102  
28  
29  
30  
Camera battery indicator..................37  
Release mode (single frame/  
MB-D10 battery type display........ 280  
MB-D10 battery indicator.............. 279  
“Beep” indicator............................... 275  
continuous) indicator........................86  
Continuous shooting speed ............88  
FV lock indicator...............................179  
31  
43  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Changing Settings in the Information Display  
To change settings for the items listed below,  
press the R button in the information  
display. Highlight items using the multi  
selector and press J to view options for the  
highlighted item.  
R button  
X
3
4
5
2
1
10  
9
8
7
6
1 Shooting menu bank.................. 254 6 Fn button assignment................. 292  
2 High ISO noise reduction........... 259 7 AE-L/AF-L button assignment..... 296  
3 Active D-Lighting......................... 164 8 Picture Control.............................. 154  
4 Color space.................................... 166 9 Long exposure noise  
reduction ....................................... 258  
5 Depth-of-field preview button  
assignment.................................... 296 10 Custom settings bank................. 262  
A Tool Tips  
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the  
information display. Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d4  
(Screen tips; 0 276).  
A Viewing Button Assignments  
0, 2, and 4 icons indicate the “button press” function (0 292, 296)  
performed respectively by the depth-of-field preview button, Fn button,  
and AE-L/AF-L button. The “button+dials” functions (0 295) are indicated  
by 1, 3, and 5 icons. If separate functions have been assigned to  
“button press” and “button + dials,” the latter assignment can be viewed  
by pressing the W button.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The BM-8 Monitor Cover  
A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera  
to keep the monitor clean and protect it when  
the camera is not in use. To attach the cover,  
insert the projection on the top of the cover into  
the matching indentation above the camera  
monitor (q) and press the bottom of the cover  
until it clicks into place (w).  
X
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly and  
pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as  
shown at right.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
s
Tutorial  
This section describes how to use the camera menus, how to ready  
the camera for use, and how to take your first pictures and play  
them back.  
s
Camera Menus ......................................................................... 18  
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................. 19  
Help .............................................................................................................. 21  
First Steps ................................................................................. 22  
Charge the Battery .................................................................................. 22  
Insert the Battery..................................................................................... 24  
Attach a Lens............................................................................................. 26  
Basic Setup................................................................................................. 28  
Insert a Memory Card............................................................................. 31  
Format the Memory Card ..................................................................... 34  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus........................................................................ 36  
Basic Photography and Playback......................................... 37  
Turn the Camera On ............................................................................... 37  
Adjust Camera Settings......................................................................... 40  
Ready the Camera ................................................................................... 42  
Focus and Shoot ...................................................................................... 43  
Viewing Photographs............................................................................. 45  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs ..................................................... 46  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Menus  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options  
can be accessed from the camera menus. To  
view the menus, press the G button.  
G button  
s
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
• D: Playback (0 244)  
• C: Shooting (0 253)  
• A: Custom Settings (0 260)  
• B: Setup (0 300)  
• N: Retouch (0 315)  
• O/m: My Menu or Recent settings  
(defaults to My Menu; 0 333)  
Slider shows position in current menu.  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
d
If d icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing L  
(Q) button (0 21).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Camera Menus  
❚❚Menu Controls  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.  
Multi selector  
Select  
highlighted  
item  
Move cursor up  
Select  
Cancel and return  
to previous menu  
highlighted  
item or display  
sub-menu  
s
J button  
Select highlighted  
item  
Move cursor down  
❚❚Navigating the Menus  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1 Display the menus.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the  
menus.  
2 Highlight the icon for the  
current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the icon  
for the current menu.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.  
s
4 Position the cursor in the  
selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the cursor  
in the selected menu.  
5 Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a  
menu item.  
6 Display options.  
Press 2 to display options for  
the selected menu item.  
7 Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an  
option.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted item.  
To exit without making a selection, press  
the G button.  
J button  
s
Note the following points:  
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.  
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has  
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which  
selection can only be made by pressing J.  
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway (0 44).  
Help  
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left  
corner of the monitor, help can be displayed  
by pressing the L (Q) button.  
A description of the currently  
selected option or menu will  
be displayed while the button  
is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to  
scroll through the display.  
L (Q) button  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Steps  
Charge the Battery  
The D300S is powered by an EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery  
(supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the  
supplied MH-18a quick charger before use. About two and a  
quarter hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no  
charge remains.  
s
1 Plug the charger in.  
Insert the AC adapter plug into the  
battery charger and plug the power  
cable into an electrical outlet.  
2 Remove the terminal cover.  
Remove the terminal cover from the  
battery.  
Terminal  
cover  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Insert the battery.  
Insert the battery into the charger. The  
CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery  
charges.  
s
Battery Charging  
charging complete  
4 Remove the battery when charging  
is complete.  
Charging is complete when the CHARGE  
lamp stops blinking. Remove the battery  
and unplug the charger.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert the Battery  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Power switch  
s
D Inserting and Removing Batteries  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries.  
2 Open the battery-chamber cover.  
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the battery-  
chamber cover.  
3 Insert the battery.  
Insert the battery as shown at right.  
4 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D The Battery and Charger  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii–xx and 364–367  
of this manual. To prevent short-circuits, replace the terminal cover  
when the battery is not in use.  
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or  
above 40°C (104°F). Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the  
vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best results, charge the battery at  
temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may temporarily  
drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a  
temperature below the temperature at which it was charged. If the  
battery is charged at a temperature below 5°C (41°F), the battery life  
indicator in the Battery info (0 307) display may show a temporary  
decrease.  
s
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to  
cool before recharging.  
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in  
use.  
D Incompatible Batteries  
The D300S can not be used with EN-EL3 or EN-EL3a rechargeable Li-ion  
batteries for the D100, D70 series, or D50 or with the MS-D70 CR2  
battery holder.  
A EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries  
The supplied EN-EL3e shares information with compatible devices,  
enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (0 37).  
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge,  
battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last  
charged (0 307).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attach a Lens  
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera  
when the lens is removed. An AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm  
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes.  
Mounting index  
Focal length  
Focal length index  
scale  
Focus mode switch (0 27, 83)  
Lens cap  
CPU contacts (0 340)  
s
Rear lens cap  
VR (vibration reduction) switch  
VR mode switch  
Zoom ring  
Focus ring (0 83)  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.  
q
w
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Attach the lens.  
Keeping the mounting index on the lens  
aligned with the mounting index on the  
camera body, position the lens in the  
camera’s bayonet mount (q). Being  
careful not to press the lens-release  
button, rotate the lens counter-  
clockwise until it clicks into place (w).  
s
Mounting index  
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or  
M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or M/  
A (autofocus with manual priority).  
❚❚Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or  
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens,  
press and hold the lens release button (q)  
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After  
removing the lens, replace the lens caps  
and camera body cap.  
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings  
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 340), lock  
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
The language option in the setup menu is automatically  
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language  
and set the time and date. Note that if the time and date are not  
set, B will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded  
with photographs will be incorrect.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Power switch  
s
2 Select Language.  
G button  
Press G to display the  
camera menus, then select  
Language in the setup menu.  
For information on using  
menus, see “Using Camera  
Menus” (0 19).  
3 Select a language.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the  
desired language and press J.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Select Time zone and date.  
Select Time zone and date  
and press 2.  
5 Set time zone.  
Select Time zone and press 2.  
Press 4or 2to highlight the  
local time zone (the UTC field  
shows the difference between  
the selected time zone and  
Coordinated Universal Time, or  
UTC, in hours) and press J.  
s
6 Turn daylight saving time  
on or off.  
Select Daylight saving time  
and press 2. Daylight saving  
time is off by default; if daylight  
saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1to  
highlight On and press J.  
7 Set the date and time.  
Select Date and time and  
press 2. Press 4or 2to select  
an item, 1or 3to change.  
Press J when the clock is set to  
the current date and time.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Set date format.  
Select Date format and press  
2. Press 1or 3to choose the  
order in which the year, month,  
and day will be displayed and  
press J.  
9 Exit to shooting mode.  
s
Press the shutter-release button halfway  
to exit to shooting mode.  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power  
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed  
or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter  
(0352). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three  
months. If the  
icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is  
B
exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct  
time and date.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household  
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and  
reset as necessary.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert a Memory Card  
The camera has two memory card slots, one for Type I  
CompactFlash memory cards (Type II cards and microdrives can  
not be used) and another for Secure Digital (SD) memory cards  
(memory cards are available separately; 0 393). The following  
section describes how to insert and format a memory card.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Power switch  
s
D Inserting and Removing Memory Cards  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory  
cards.  
2 Open the card slot cover.  
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and  
open the card slot (w).  
3 Insert the memory card.  
CompactFlash  
card slot  
CompactFlash memory cards: Insert the card  
into the CompactFlash card slot with the  
front label toward the monitor (q).  
GB  
4
When the memory card is fully inserted,  
the eject button will pop up (w) and the  
green access lamp will light briefly.  
Eject button  
Access lamp  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SD memory cards: Holding the card as  
shown, slide it into the SD card slot until  
it clicks into place. The green access  
lamp will light briefly.  
GB  
2
SD card slot  
Access lamp  
D Inserting Memory Cards  
s
Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could damage  
the camera or the card. Check to be sure that the card is in the  
correct orientation.  
If this is the first time the memory card will be used after being  
used or formatted in another device, format the card as  
described on page 34.  
4 Close the card slot cover.  
A Using Two Memory Cards  
See page 72 for information on choosing  
the roles played by each card when two  
cards are inserted in the camera.  
D Memory Card Icons  
The memory cards currently inserted in the  
camera are indicated as shown (the example at  
right shows the icons displayed when both a  
CompactFlash and an SD card are inserted). If  
the memory card is full or locked or an error has  
Control panel  
occurred, the icon for the affected card will  
blink (0 381).  
Information display  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Removing Memory Cards  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Confirm that the access lamp is off and  
turn the camera off.  
Access lamp  
s
2 Remove the memory card.  
GB  
4
CompactFlash memory cards: Open the  
memory card slot cover and press the  
eject button (q) to partially eject the  
card (w). The memory card can then be  
removed by hand. Do not push on the  
memory card while pressing the eject button. Failure to  
observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory  
card.  
SD memory cards: Open the memory card  
slot cover and press the card in to eject it  
(q). The memory card can then be  
GB  
2
removed by hand (w).  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Format the Memory Card  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being  
used or formatted in other devices.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.  
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a  
computer before proceeding (0 224).  
s
1 Turn the camera on.  
2 Press the Q buttons.  
O button I button  
Hold the Q (I and O)  
buttons down simultaneously  
until a blinking C appears  
in the shutter-speed displays  
in the control panel and  
viewfinder. If two memory  
cards are inserted, the primary  
card slot (0 72) will be  
selected; you can choose the  
secondary slot by rotating the  
main command dial. To exit  
without formatting the  
memory card, wait until C stops blinking (about six  
seconds) or press any button other than the Q (I and O)  
buttons.  
3 Press the Q buttons again.  
Press the Q (I and O) buttons together a second time  
while C is blinking to format the memory card. Do not  
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power  
source during formatting.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When formatting is complete, the control panel and  
viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be  
recorded at current settings.  
D Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when  
removing memory cards from the camera.  
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do  
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or  
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while  
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to  
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to  
the camera or card.  
s
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the card.  
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
A The Write Protect Switch  
SD memory cards are equipped with a  
write protect switch to prevent  
accidental loss of data. When this switch  
is in the “lock” position, photos can not  
be recorded or deleted and the memory  
Write-protect switch  
card can not be formatted. To unlock the memory card, slide the switch  
to the “write” position.  
A No Memory Card  
If no memory card is inserted, the control  
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the  
camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL3e  
battery and no memory card inserted, S  
will be displayed in the control panel.  
A See Also  
See page 301 for information on formatting memory cards using the  
Format memory card option in the setup menu.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus  
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate  
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the  
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Power switch  
Remove the lens cap and turn  
the camera on.  
s
2 Focus the viewfinder.  
Rotate the diopter control  
until the viewfinder display,  
focus points, and AF area  
brackets are in sharp focus.  
When operating the diopter  
control with your eye to the  
viewfinder, be careful not to  
put your fingers or fingernails  
in your eye.  
AF area brackets  
Focus point  
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus  
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, rotate the  
AF-area mode selector to K (single-point AF) and the focus mode  
selector to S, then frame a high-contrast subject in the center focus  
point and focus using autofocus. With the camera in focus, rotate the  
diopter control until the subject is clearly focused in the viewfinder. If  
necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional  
corrective lenses (0 353).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Photography and Playback  
Turn the Camera On  
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the  
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described  
below.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Power switch  
s
Turn the camera on. The  
control panel will turn on and  
the display in the viewfinder  
will light.  
2 Check the battery level.  
Check the battery level in the control  
panel or viewfinder.  
Icon *  
Control panel  
L
Viewfinder  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
—
—
—
—
K
J
Battery partially discharged.  
I
Low battery. Prepare to charge battery  
or ready spare battery.  
H
d
H
(blinks)  
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or  
(blinks) exchange battery.  
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Check the number of exposures remaining.  
The exposure-count displays in the  
control panel and viewfinder show  
the number of photographs that can  
be taken at current settings (if two  
memory cards are inserted, the  
displays show the space available on  
the card in the primary slot; 0 72).  
When this number reaches zero, A will  
flash in the exposure-count displays  
while the shutter-speed displays will  
show a blinking n or j and the  
icon for the affected card will blink.  
s
A Large-Capacity Memory Cards  
When enough memory remains on the mem-  
ory card to record a thousand or more pictures  
at current settings, the number of exposures  
remaining will be shown in thousands,  
rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if  
there is room for approximately 1,260 expo-  
sures, the exposure count display will show 1.2 K).  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A LCD Illuminators  
Rotating the power switch toward D  
activates the exposure meters and  
the control panel backlight (LCD  
illuminator), allowing the display to  
be read in the dark. After the power  
switch is released, the illuminators  
will remain lit for six seconds while  
the exposure meters are active or  
Power switch  
until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward D  
again.  
s
A Auto Meter Off  
The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and  
viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six  
seconds (auto meter off), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the  
shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the  
viewfinder (0 44).  
6 s  
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically  
can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay,  
0 273).  
A Camera Off Display  
If the camera is turned off with a battery and  
memory card inserted, the memory card icon  
and number of exposures remaining will be  
displayed (some memory cards may in rare  
cases only display this information when the  
camera is on).  
Control panel  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust Camera Settings  
This tutorial describes the basic steps involved in taking photos.  
1 Choose exposure mode e.  
I button  
Press the I button and rotate the  
main command dial to select exposure  
mode e. The camera will automatically  
adjust shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most situations.  
s
Main command  
dial  
2 Choose single frame  
Release mode dial  
lock release  
release mode.  
Hold the release mode dial lock  
release down and turn the  
release mode dial to S (single  
frame). At this setting, the  
camera will take one  
photograph each time the  
shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
Release mode dial  
3 Choose single-point AF.  
AF-area mode  
selector  
Rotate the AF-area mode  
selector until it clicks into place  
pointing to K (single-point  
AF). At this setting, the user  
can choose the focus point.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Choose single-servo  
Focus-mode  
selector  
autofocus.  
Rotate the focus-mode selector  
until it clicks into place  
pointing to S (single-servo  
autofocus). At this setting, the  
camera will automatically focus  
on the subject in the selected  
focus point when the shutter-  
release button is pressed  
s
halfway. Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in  
focus.  
5 Choose matrix metering.  
Metering selector  
Rotate the metering selector to  
Y (matrix metering). Matrix  
metering uses information  
from the 1,005-pixel RGB  
sensor to ensure optimal  
results for the entire frame.  
6 Check camera settings.  
Exposure mode  
AF-area mode  
Metering  
Control panel  
Viewfinder display  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ready the Camera  
When framing photographs in the  
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right  
hand and cradle the camera body or lens  
with your left. Keep your elbows propped  
lightly against your torso for support and  
place one foot half a pace ahead of the other  
to keep you upper body stable.  
s
Hold the camera as shown at right when  
framing photographs in portrait (tall)  
orientation.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus and Shoot  
1 Press the shutter-  
release button  
halfway to focus  
(0 44).  
Focus point  
At default settings, the  
camera will focus on the  
subject in the center  
focus point. Frame a  
photo in the viewfinder  
with the main subject  
positioned in the center  
s
Focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway. If  
the camera is able to focus, a beep will sound and the in-focus  
indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder. If the subject is  
dark, the AF-assist illuminator may light automatically to assist  
the focus operation.  
Viewfinder display  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
I
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus  
point using autofocus.  
(blinks)  
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,  
focus will lock and the number of exposures that  
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 89) will  
be shown in the viewfinder display.  
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus  
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”  
(0 82).  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down to shoot.  
Smoothly press the shutter-  
release-button the rest of the  
way down to take the picture.  
While the photograph is being  
Access lamp  
recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the card  
slot cover will light. Do not eject the memory card or remove or  
disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out.  
s
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera  
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the  
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.  
Focus  
Take photograph  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Photographs  
1 Press the K button.  
K button  
A photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
The memory card  
containing the picture  
currently displayed is  
shown by an icon.  
s
2 View additional pictures.  
Additional pictures can be  
displayed by pressing 4 or 2.  
To view additional information  
on the current photograph,  
press 1 and 3 (0 207).  
1/10  
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
.
1
125 F5  
6
200  
35mm  
AUTO 0,  
0
20100D300S 10DSC_0001. JPG  
NOR AL  
4288x2M848  
15 04 2009 10 : 15 : 29  
/
/
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 251),  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s  
after shooting.  
A See Also  
See page 217 for information on choosing a memory card slot.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press  
the O button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once  
deleted.  
1 Display the photograph.  
Display the photograph you wish to  
delete as described in “Viewing  
Photographs” on the previous page.  
s
2 Delete the photograph.  
Press the O button. A  
confirmation dialog will  
be displayed (the location  
of the current picture is  
shown by the icon in the  
bottom left corner of the  
dialog).  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the image and return to  
playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press K.  
A Delete  
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which  
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu  
(0 221).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Framing Pictures in the  
Monitor (Live View)  
This chapter describes how to frame pictures in the monitor using  
live view.  
x
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ................................. 48  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Framing Photographs in the  
Monitor  
Press the a button to frame pictures in the monitor. The following  
options are available:  
• Tripod (h): Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod  
(0 49). You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor  
for precise focus, making this option suitable for static subjects.  
Contrast-detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs  
with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame.  
• Hand-held (g): Choose when taking hand-held shots of moving  
subjects, or when framing photographs at angles that make it  
difficult to use the viewfinder (0 52). Camera focuses normally  
using phase-detection autofocus.  
x
A Phase-Detection Versus Contrast-Detect AF  
The camera normally uses phase-detection autofocus, in which focus is  
adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor. When Tripod is  
selected in live view, however, the camera uses contrast-detect  
autofocus, in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor  
and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast. Contrast-detect  
autofocus takes longer than phase-detection autofocus.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tripod Mode (h)  
1 Frame a picture in the viewfinder.  
With the camera mounted on a tripod or resting on a stable,  
level surface, frame the subject in the viewfinder.  
2 Choose Tripod for  
G button  
Live view mode.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Tripod in the  
Live view mode menu  
and press J.  
x
3 Press the a button.  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
The mirror will be raised  
and the view through  
the lens will be displayed  
in the camera monitor  
instead of the  
a button  
viewfinder.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Focus.  
Autofocus (focus mode S or C): In  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
tripod mode, the focus point  
for contrast-detect autofocus  
can be moved to any point in  
the frame using the multi  
selector.  
Contrast-detect focus point  
To focus using contrast-detect  
B button  
autofocus, press the B button. The  
focus point will blink green and the  
x
monitor may brighten while the camera  
focuses. If the camera is able to focus  
using contrast-detect autofocus, the  
focus point will be displayed in green; if  
the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink red.  
D Contrast-Detect Autofocus  
The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the B button  
is pressed in continuous-servo autofocus mode. In both single-  
servo and continuous-servo autofocus modes, the shutter can be  
released even when the camera is not in focus.  
Manual focus (focus mode M; 0 83): Use zoom for precise focus.  
To magnify the view in the  
monitor up to 13 × and  
check focus, press the X  
button.  
X button  
A
While the view through  
the lens is zoomed in, a  
navigation window will  
appear in the bottom right corner of the display.  
Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame  
not visible in the monitor.  
Press J to exit zoom.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down to take the picture.  
The monitor turns off  
during shooting.  
6 End live view.  
Press the a button to end live view.  
x
D Focusing with Contrast-Detect Autofocus  
Contrast-detect autofocus will take longer than normal (phase-  
detection) autofocus. In the following situations, the camera may be  
unable to focus using contrast-detect autofocus:  
• The camera is not mounted on a tripod  
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
• The subject lacks contrast  
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting  
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or  
other light source that changes in brightness  
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-  
vapor, or similar lighting  
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns  
(e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)  
• The subject is moving  
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when  
the camera is unable to focus.  
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other  
lenses or teleconverters.  
A Remote Cords  
If the shutter-release button on a remote cord (available separately; see  
0 356) is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode, it will  
activate contrast-detect autofocus. If the remote cord shutter-release  
button is pressed all the way down without focusing, focus will not be  
adjusted before the picture is taken.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hand-Held Mode (g)  
1 Choose Hand-held  
G button  
for Live view mode.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Hand-held in  
the Live view mode  
menu and press J.  
x
2 Press the a button.  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
The mirror will be raised  
and the view through  
the lens will be displayed  
in the camera monitor  
instead of the  
a button  
viewfinder.  
3 Frame a picture in the monitor.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 3 ×, press the X  
button.  
X button  
A
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a  
navigation window will appear in the bottom right  
corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll  
within the AF area brackets.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Focus.  
Autofocus (focus mode S or C):  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway or press the  
B button. The camera will  
focus normally and set  
exposure. Note that the mirror will click back into place while  
either button is pressed, temporarily interrupting live view.  
Live view is restored when the button is released.  
x
Manual focus (focus mode M; 0 83): Focus using the lens  
focusing ring.  
5 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest  
of the way down to reset focus and  
exposure and take the picture. The monitor turns off during  
shooting.  
6 End live view.  
Press the a button to end live view.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D No Picture  
After shooting, play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the  
photograph has been recorded. In hand held mode, note that the  
sound the mirror makes when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway or the B button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of  
the shutter, and that if single-servo AF is used, a photograph will only be  
recorded if the camera is able to focus.  
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion  
may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or  
sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an object  
moves at high speed through the frame. Bright light sources may leave  
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots  
may also appear. When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the  
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
x
Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed.  
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour.  
Note, however, that when used in live view  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
27s  
mode for extended periods, the camera may  
become noticeably warm and its internal  
temperature may rise, resulting in image noise  
and unusual colors. To prevent damage to the  
camera’s internal circuits, live view shooting will  
end automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display  
will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient  
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view  
mode is selected.  
During live view, the camera displays the shutter speed and aperture in  
effect at the start of live view. Exposure is metered again when the  
shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.  
Metering can not be changed during live view. Choose a metering  
method before starting live view. To reduce blur in tripod mode, choose  
On for Custom Setting d10 (Exposure delay mode, 0 278).  
A Exposure Compensation  
In P, S, and A modes, exposure compensation can be adjusted by 5 EV  
in increments of 1/3 EV (0 118).  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Information Display  
To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the  
R button.  
Information on  
Information off  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
x
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
Virtual horizon  
Framing guides  
(not displayed during zoom)  
(not displayed during zoom)  
A AF area brackets  
AF area brackets are displayed only in hand held mode.  
Hand-held  
Tripod  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Monitor Brightness  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
Monitor brightness can be adjusted by  
pressing the K and 2 button. The brightness  
indicator at the right of the display will turn  
yellow; keeping the K button pressed, press  
1 or 3 to adjust brightness (note that monitor  
brightness has no effect on pictures taken in  
live view mode). To return to live view, release the K button.  
A HDMI  
When the camera is attached to an  
HDMI video device, the camera  
monitor will turn off and the video  
device will display the view through  
the lens as shown at right.  
x
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
y
Recording and Viewing  
Movies  
This chapter describes how to record movies in live view.  
y
Recording Movies.................................................................... 58  
Viewing Movies........................................................................ 63  
Editing Movies ......................................................................... 64  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded at 24 fps in live view mode. Before  
recording, choose a Picture Control (0 154) and color space (0 166).  
1 Choose a live view mode.  
G button  
To display the menus, press  
the G button. Highlight  
an option in the Live view  
mode menu and press J:  
• Tripod: In modes g and h,  
movies are recorded at  
y
the aperture selected before live view starts (0 109, 111; the  
smallest aperture available with movies is f/16). Focus can  
be adjusted during shooting using contrast-detect AF.  
• Hand-held: The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed  
and aperture in response to changes in subject brightness.  
A Using an External Microphone  
Instead of the built-in microphone, commercially-available external  
microphones can be used to avoid picking up sounds produced by  
the lens during focusing or vibration reduction. Stereo recording is  
available with any microphone that has a stereo mini-pin jack  
(3.5mm diameter). Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted in the  
Movie settings > Microphone menu (0 62).  
2 Press the a button.  
The mirror is raised and the view through  
the lens is displayed in the monitor  
instead of the viewfinder.  
D The 0 Icon  
a button  
A 0 icon indicates that movies can not be  
recorded.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Focus.  
B button  
Before shooting, frame the  
opening shot and either press  
the B button (Tripod) or  
press the shutter-release  
button halfway (Hand-held) to  
focus on your subject. In hand-  
held mode, autofocus is not available after recording begins.  
4 Start recording.  
Recording indicator  
Press the center of the multi  
selector to start recording.  
Both video and monaural  
sound are recorded; do not  
cover the microphone during  
recording (the built-in  
y
Time remaining  
microphone is located on the  
front of the camera). A recording indicator and the time  
available are displayed in the monitor. Exposure can be locked  
by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (0116) or altered by up to  
3 EV using exposure compensation (0118).  
A Focusing During Recording  
In tripod mode, the camera can be focused by pressing the B  
button (during shooting, a beep will not sound when the camera  
focuses, but note that other sounds made during contrast-detect  
autofocus may be picked up by the microphone). Autofocus is not  
available in hand-held mode after recording begins; use manual  
focus to focus during recording (0 83; note that in hand-held  
mode, recording will end if the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway or the B button is pressed).  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 End recording.  
Press the center of the multi selector again to end recording  
(to end recording and take a still picture in live view, press the  
shutter-release button all the way down). Recording will end  
automatically when the maximum size is reached or the  
memory card is full.  
A Maximum Size  
Individual movie files can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum  
length is 5 minutes for movies with a frame size of 1280 × 720, 20  
minutes for other movies; note that depending on memory card  
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.  
y
A See Also  
Frame size and microphone sensitivity can be selected in the Movie  
settings menu (0 62). The behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button can be  
adjusted using Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 296).  
A Adjusting Microphone Sensitivity  
Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
without leaving live view. Before pressing the  
center of the multi selector to start recording,  
hold the K button and press 4. A microphone  
settings icon will be displayed in the monitor.  
Keep the K button pressed and press 1 and  
3 to adjust microphone sensitivity.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Recording Movies  
Banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final  
movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the  
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed  
through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images when the  
camera is panned. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots  
may also appear. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at  
the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
In tripod mode, movies may be over- or under-exposed at some  
aperture settings. Before shooting, check the brightness of the scene in  
the monitor; if the picture is too bright or too dark, end live view and  
adjust aperture as necessary. Note that depending on the brightness of  
the subject, changes to exposure may have no visible effect.  
y
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed. Recording may  
end automatically before the maximum file size is reached when  
recording to memory cards with slow write speeds.  
When used in live view mode for extended  
periods, the camera’s internal temperature may  
NORM  
AUTO  
[120m 00s]  
A
27s  
rise, resulting in image noise and unusual colors  
(the camera may also become noticeably warm,  
but this does not indicated a malfunction). To  
prevent damage to the camera’s internal  
circuits, recording will end automatically before  
the camera overheats. A count-down display will appear in the monitor  
30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display  
may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.  
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.  
The camera adjusts shutter speed and ISO sensitivity automatically.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Movie Settings  
Adjust movie settings before recording.  
1 Select Movie settings. G button  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Movie settings  
in the shooting menu and  
press 2.  
2 Choose movie options.  
y
To choose a frame size,  
highlight Quality and press 2.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J to select:  
Option  
Frame size (pixels)  
1280 × 720  
640 × 424  
Maximum length  
1280×720 (16:9)  
640×424 (3:2)  
320×216 (3:2)  
5 min.  
a
b
c
20 min.  
320 × 216  
To turn the built-in or external microphone on or off or to  
adjust microphone sensitivity, highlight Microphone and  
press 2. To turn sound recording off, highlight Microphone  
off and press J. Selecting any other option turns recording  
on and sets the microphone to the selected sensitivity.  
To choose a destination when using two  
memory cards, highlight Destination  
and press 2. To record movies to the  
CompactFlash card, highlight CF card  
slot and press J. Select SD card slot to  
record movies to the SD memory card.  
The menu shows the time available on each card; recording  
ends automatically when no time remains.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0204).  
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Guide  
Volume  
The following operations can be performed:  
y
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
3/J Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or  
during rewind/advance.  
Play  
While playback is in  
progress, speed doubles  
with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×;  
4/2 keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of  
movie. While playback is paused, movie rewinds  
or advances one frame at a time; keep pressed  
for continuous rewind or advance.  
Rewind/  
advance  
Adjust volume  
Trim movie  
Press to increase volume, W to decrease.  
See page 64 for more information.  
X
X/W  
J
Resume  
shooting  
Monitor turns off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
Display menus  
Exit  
G
See page 243 for more information.  
1/K Exit to full-frame playback.  
A 2 icon  
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback  
if Microphone off is selected for Microphone in Movie settings menu.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Movies  
Trim unwanted footage to create edited copies of movies.  
1 Display retouch options.  
Display a movie in full-frame  
playback and press J to  
display retouch options.  
2 Select Edit movie.  
Highlight Edit movie and press  
y
2.  
3 Choose an option.  
To trim the opening footage  
from the copy, highlight  
Choose start point and press  
J. Select Choose end point to  
trim the ending footage.  
4 View the movie and choose a  
starting or end point.  
Press the center of the multi selector to  
start or resume playback, 3 to pause, and  
4 or 2 to rewind or advance (0 63; pause  
to rewind or advance one frame at a time). The X and W  
buttons control volume. With the movie paused on the  
desired frame, press 1 to delete all frames before (Choose  
start point) or after (Choose end point) the selected frame.  
Starting and ending frames are shown by h and i icons.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Save the copy.  
Select Yes and press J to save the edited  
copy. If necessary, the copy can be  
trimmed as described above to remove  
additional footage. Edited copies are  
indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame  
playback.  
D Editing Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The current position will  
be displayed in red if creating a copy at the current playback  
position would result in a movie less than two seconds long. The  
copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the  
memory card.  
y
To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly, use a fully-  
charged battery when editing movies.  
A The Retouch Menu  
Movies can also be edited from the retouch  
menu (0 315).  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
y
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d
Image Recording Options  
This section describes how to choose image quality and size.  
Image Quality........................................................................... 68  
Image Size................................................................................. 71  
Using Two Memory Cards...................................................... 72  
d
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Quality  
The D300S supports the following image quality options. See  
page 394 for information on the number of pictures that can be  
stored at different image quality and size settings.  
Option  
File type  
Description  
RAW data from the image sensor are saved  
directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic  
Format (NEF). Use with images that will be  
transferred to a computer for printing or  
processing.  
NEF (RAW)  
NEF  
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit  
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is  
(RGB) supported by a wide variety of imaging  
applications.  
TIFF  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine  
d
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
JPEG normal JPEG  
JPEG basic  
roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). *  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG fine  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image  
and one fine-quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW)+  
NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image  
JPEG normal JPEG and one normal-quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image  
and one basic-quality JPEG image.  
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.  
A NEF (RAW) Recording  
The NEF (RAW) recording item in the shooting menu controls  
compression (0 70) and bit depth (0 70) for NEF (RAW) images.  
A JPEG Compression  
JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or  
optimal image quality. The JPEG compression option in the shooting  
menu can be used to choose the type of compression (0 70).  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image quality is set by pressing  
the QUAL button and rotating the  
main command dial until the  
desired setting is displayed in the  
control panel.  
QUAL button  
Main command  
dial  
Control panel  
d
A NEF (RAW)  
Once transferred to a computer, NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed  
using ViewNX (available on the supplied Software Suite CD) or  
Capture NX 2 (available separately;  
0
355). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 327). Note that the option selected for image size  
does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.  
A NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed  
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG  
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same  
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If  
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the  
Secondary slot function > RAW primary, JPEG secondary option,  
deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image.  
A The Image Quality Menu  
Image quality can also be adjusted using the  
Image quality option in the shooting menu  
(0 253).  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following options can be  
accessed from the shooting  
menu. Press the G button to  
display the menus, highlight  
the desired option and press 2.  
G button  
❚❚JPEG Compression  
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.  
Option  
Description  
Images are compressed to produce relatively  
uniform file size.  
Size priority  
O
P
Optimal  
quality  
Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene  
recorded.  
d
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > Type  
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.  
Option  
Description  
NEF images are compressed using a reversible  
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%  
with no effect on image quality.  
Lossless  
compressed  
N
NEF images are compressed using a non-  
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about  
40–55% with almost no effect on image quality.  
O Compressed  
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.  
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth  
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.  
Option  
Description  
q 12-bit NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.  
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 14 bits,  
producing files roughly 1.3 times larger than 12-bit files  
but increasing the color data recorded. Maximum frame  
r 14-bit  
advance rate (0 89) falls to 2.5 fps.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from the following  
options:  
Option  
Size (pixels)  
Size when printed at 300 dpi (approx.) *  
36.3 × 24.1 cm (14.3 × 9.5 in.)  
27.2 × 18.1 cm (10.7 × 7.1 in.)  
18.2 × 12.1 cm (7.1 × 4.7 in.)  
L
M
S
4,288 × 2,848  
3,216 × 2,136  
2,144 × 1,424  
* Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in  
dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).  
Image size can be set by pressing  
the QUAL button and rotating the  
sub-command dial until the  
desired option is displayed in the  
control panel.  
d
QUAL button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
A The Image Size Menu  
Image size can also be adjusted using the  
Image size option in the shooting menu  
(0 253).  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Two Memory Cards  
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can  
choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot selection  
item in the shooting menu. Select CF card slot to designate the  
card in the CompactFlash card slot as the primary card, SD card  
slot to choose the SD memory card. The roles played by the  
primary and secondary cards can be chosen using the Secondary  
slot function option in the shooting menu. Choose from  
Overflow (the secondary card is used only when the primary card  
is full), Backup (each picture is recorded to both the primary and  
secondary card), and RAW primary, JPEG secondary (as for  
Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of photos recorded at  
settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to the primary card  
and the JPEG copies only to the secondary card).  
d
A “Backup” and “RAW Primary, JPEG Secondary”  
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with  
the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled when  
either card is full.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N
Focus  
– Controlling How the Camera Focuses  
This section describes the options that control how your camera  
focuses.  
Focus Mode .............................................................................. 74  
AF-Area Mode .......................................................................... 76  
Focus Point Selection ............................................................. 78  
Focus Lock ................................................................................ 80  
Manual Focus ........................................................................... 83  
N
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Mode  
Focus mode is controlled by the  
focus-mode selector on the front of  
the camera. There are two  
Focus-mode selector  
autofocus (AF) modes, in which the  
camera focuses automatically  
when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway, and one manual  
focus mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually using the  
focusing ring on the lens:  
Option  
Description  
Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. Focus locks when in-focus indicator (I) appears  
in viewfinder, and remains locked while shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway (focus lock). At default settings,  
shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is  
displayed (focus priority).  
S
Single-servo  
AF  
N
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage  
predictive focus tracking (0 75) to predict final distance to  
subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings,  
shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus  
(release priority).  
C
Continuous-  
servo AF  
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be  
adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring. If  
maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6 or faster, viewfinder  
focus indicator can be used to confirm focus (electronic  
range finding; 0 84), but photographs can be taken at any  
time, whether or not subject is in focus.  
M
Manual  
(0 83)  
Choose single-servo AF for landscapes and other stationary  
subjects. Continuous-servo AF may be a better choice with  
erratically-moving subjects. Manual focus is recommended when  
the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The B Button  
For the purpose of focusing the camera,  
pressing the B button has the same effect as  
pressing the shutter-release button halfway;  
note, however, that vibration reduction  
(available with VR lenses) can only be engaged  
by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.  
B button  
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In continuous-servo AF, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking  
if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway or the B button is pressed. This  
allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the  
subject will be when the shutter is released.  
A See Also  
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see  
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 263). For information on  
using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S  
priority selection, 0 264). For information on preventing the camera  
from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see  
Custom Setting a5 (AF activation, 0 266).  
N
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode determines how the  
focus point is selected in autofocus  
mode (0 74). To select the AF-area  
mode, rotate the AF-area mode  
selector. The following options are  
available:  
AF-area mode selector  
Mode  
Description  
User selects focus point manually; camera focuses on  
subject in selected focus point only. Use for relatively static  
compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus  
point.  
K
Single-  
point AF  
• In continuous-servo AF ( 74), user selects focus point  
0
manually; if subject briefly leaves selected focus point,  
camera will focus based on information from surrounding  
points. Number of focus points used can be selected from  
9, 21, and 51 using Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area,  
0 264). If 51 points (3D-tracking) is selected for Custom  
Setting a3, focus point will be selected automatically  
using 3D-tracking.  
N
I
Dynamic-  
area AF  
• In single-servo AF, user selects focus point manually; camera  
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.  
Camera automatically detects  
subject and selects focus point. If  
type G or D lens is used, camera can  
distinguish human subjects from  
H
Auto-area background for improved subject  
AF  
detection. In single-servo AF, active  
focus points are highlighted for  
about one second after camera focuses. Active focus points  
are not displayed in continuous-servo AF.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel.  
AF-area mode  
indicator  
AF-area mode  
Control panel  
K
I
H
Single-point AF  
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, 0 264)  
9 points  
21 points  
51 points  
Dynamic-  
area AF *  
N
51 points (3D-tracking)  
Auto-area AF  
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus  
points provide information to assist focus operation.  
A Manual Focus  
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
A See Also  
For information on the settings available in dynamic-area AF, see  
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, 0 264). For information on  
adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object  
moves in front of the camera, see Custom Setting a4 (Focus tracking  
with lock-on, 0 266).  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Point Selection  
The D300S offers a choice of 51  
focus points that together cover a  
wide area of the frame. The focus  
point can be selected manually,  
allowing photographs to be  
composed with the main subject  
positioned almost anywhere in the  
AF-area mode selector  
frame (single-point and dynamic-  
area AF), or automatically (auto-area AF; note that manual focus  
point detection is not available when auto-area AF is selected). To  
select the focus point manually:  
1 Rotate the focus selector  
N
lock to ●.  
This allows the multi selector to  
be used to select the focus  
point.  
Focus selector lock  
2 Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select  
the focus point. The center  
focus point can be selected by  
pressing the center of the multi  
selector.  
The focus selector lock can be  
rotated to the locked (L)  
position following selection to  
prevent the selected focus  
point from changing when the multi selector is pressed.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see  
Custom Setting a6 (AF point illumination, 0 266). For information on  
setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting a7  
(Focus point wrap-around, 0 267). For information on choosing the  
number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector,  
see Custom Setting a8 (AF point selection, 0 267). For information on  
changing the role of the multi selector center button, see Custom  
Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 291).  
N
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,  
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus  
point in the final composition. It can also be used when the  
autofocus system is unable to focus (0 82).  
1 Focus.  
Position the subject in the selected focus  
point and press the shutter-release  
button halfway to initiate focus.  
2 Check that the in-focus indicator  
(I) appears in the viewfinder.  
N
Single-servo AF  
Focus will lock automatically  
when the in-focus indicator  
appears, and remain locked  
until you remove your finger  
from the shutter-release  
button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L  
button (see following page).  
A Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button  
AE-L; 0 273), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuous-servo AF  
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both  
focus and exposure (an AE-L icon appears  
in the viewfinder, see page 116). Focus  
and exposure will remain locked while  
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if  
you later remove your finger from the  
shutter-release button.  
Shutter-release  
button  
AE-L/AF-L button  
N
3 Recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked  
between shots as long as the  
shutter-release button is kept  
pressed halfway, allowing several photographs in succession  
to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain  
locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the  
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus  
again at the new distance.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button, see  
Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 296).  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed  
below. The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable  
to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may  
be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the  
shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In  
these cases, use manual focus (0 83) or use focus lock (0 80) to  
focus on another subject at the same distance and then  
recompose the photograph.  
There is little or no contrast between the subject  
and the background  
Example: subject is the same color as the background.  
The focus point contains objects at different  
distances from the camera  
Example: subject is inside a cage.  
N
The subject is dominated by regular geometric  
patterns  
Example: blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.  
The focus point contains areas of sharply  
contrasting brightness  
Example: subject is half in the shade.  
Background objects appear larger than the subject  
Example: a building is in the frame behind the subject.  
The subject contains many fine details  
Example: a field of flowers or other subjects that are  
small or lack variation in brightness.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus  
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce  
the desired results (0 82).  
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.  
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode  
switch (if present) and camera  
focus-mode selector to M.  
Focus-mode selector  
D AF Lenses  
Do not select focus mode S or C.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could damage the camera.  
• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.  
N
To focus manually, adjust the lens focusing  
ring until the image displayed on the clear  
matte field in the viewfinder is in focus.  
Photographs can be taken at any time, even  
when the image is not in focus.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6  
or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can  
be used to confirm whether the subject in  
the selected focus point is in focus (the  
focus point can be selected from any of the  
51 focus points). After positioning the  
subject in the selected focus point, press  
the shutter-release button halfway and  
rotate the lens focusing ring until the in-  
focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that  
with the subjects listed on page 82, the in-  
focus indicator may sometimes be  
displayed when the subject is not in focus;  
confirm focus in the viewfinder before  
shooting.  
N
A Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your  
subject and the camera, measure from the  
focal plane mark (E) on the camera body.  
The distance between the lens mounting  
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm  
(1.83 in.).  
46.5 mm  
Focal plane mark  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
k
Release Mode  
– Single Frame, Continuous, Quiet Shutter-Release, Self-Timer, or  
Mirror Up  
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs:  
one at a time (with or without reduced camera noise), in a  
continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with  
the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize  
vibration.  
Choosing a Release Mode...................................................... 86  
Continuous Mode.................................................................... 88  
Self-Timer Mode ...................................................................... 91  
Mirror up Mode........................................................................ 93  
k
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing a Release Mode  
The camera supports the following release modes:  
Mode  
S
Description  
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release  
Single frame button is pressed.  
CL  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records  
Continuous 1–7 frames per second. 1 Frame rate can be chosen using  
low speed Custom Setting d5 (CL mode shooting speed, 0 276).  
CH  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records  
Continuous  
high speed  
up to 7 frames per second. 2  
As for single-frame except that beep does not sound when  
camera focuses regardless of setting selected for Custom  
Setting d1 (Beep; 0 275) and noise made by camera after  
shooting (from moment following shutter release to point  
J
Quiet  
shutter-  
finger is removed from shutter-release button, when mirror  
release  
is lowered) is kept to minimum, making this mode less  
k
noisy than single-frame.  
E
Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused  
Self-timer by camera shake (0 91).  
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto  
or close-up photography or in other situations in which the  
MUP  
Mirror up slightest camera movement can result in blurred  
photographs (0 93).  
1 Average frame rate with an EN-EL3e battery, continuous-servo AF, manual  
or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster,  
remaining settings other than Custom Setting d5 at default values, and  
memory remaining in memory buffer.  
2 Average frame rate with an EN-EL3e battery, continuous-servo AF, manual  
or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other  
settings at default values, and memory remaining in memory buffer.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To choose a release mode, press  
the release mode dial lock release  
and turn the release mode dial to  
the desired setting.  
Release mode dial lock  
release  
Release mode  
dial  
k
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuous Mode  
To take pictures in CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous  
low speed) modes:  
1 Select CH or CL mode.  
Press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the  
release mode dial to CH or CL.  
Release mode  
dial  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
While the shutter-release button is  
k
pressed all the way down, pictures will be taken at about 7 fps  
in continuous high speed mode, or at the frame rate selected  
for Custom Setting d5 (CL mode shooting speed, 0 276) in  
continuous low speed mode.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Power Source and Frame Rate  
The frame advance rate varies with the power source used.  
Power source  
Frame advance rate (approx.) 1  
Battery (EN-EL3e)  
7 fps  
7.6 fps 2  
7 fps  
8 fps 2  
7.7 fps 2  
AC adapter  
MB-D10 battery pack with EN-EL3e battery  
MB-D10 battery pack with EN-EL4a battery  
MB-D10 battery pack with AA-size batteries 3  
1
Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto  
exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other settings at default values,  
and memory remaining in memory buffer. Frame advance rate when  
recording NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG pictures with 14-bit selected for  
NEF (RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) bit depth (0 70) is approximately  
2.5 fps. Frame rate drops when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses)  
is on.  
2
3
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity auto control in  
the shooting menu (0 98), frame advance rate in continuous high-speed  
mode is approximately 7.5 fps.  
Frame rate slows at low temperatures and when batteries are low.  
k
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that can be  
stored in the memory buffer at current settings  
is shown in the exposure-count displays in the  
viewfinder and control panel while the shutter-  
release button is pressed. The illustration at  
right shows the display when space remains in  
the buffer for about 37 pictures.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,  
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to  
the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession;  
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access  
lamp next to the memory card slot will light. Depending on shooting  
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a  
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove  
or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the  
camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will  
not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the  
battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter  
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs  
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d6 (Max.  
continuous release, 0 276). For information on the number of  
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 394.  
k
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-Timer Mode  
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-  
portraits. To use the self-timer, mount the camera on a tripod  
(recommended) or place the camera on a stable, level surface and  
follow the steps below:  
1 Select self-timer mode.  
Press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the  
release mode dial to E.  
Release mode  
dial  
2 Frame the photograph  
Focus-mode selector  
and focus.  
k
In single-servo autofocus  
(0 74), photographs can only  
be taken if the in-focus (I)  
indicator appears in the  
viewfinder.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
When taking photos  
without your eye to  
the viewfinder,  
DK-5 eyepiece cap  
remove the DK-23  
rubber eyecup (q;  
you will need to hold  
the camera firmly)  
and cover the  
viewfinder with the  
supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap (w) to prevent light entering via the  
viewfinder from interfering with exposure.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Start the timer.  
Press the shutter-release  
button all the way down to  
start the timer. The self-timer  
lamp (AF-assist illuminator) will start to blink and a beep will  
begin to sound. Two seconds before the photograph is taken,  
the self-timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will  
become more rapid. The shutter will be released about ten  
seconds after the timer starts.  
Raising the built-in flash interrupts the timer. To restart, wait  
until the flash-ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder  
and press the shutter-release button halfway.  
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the  
release mode dial to another setting.  
k
A A  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to  
approximately 1/10 s.  
A See Also  
For information on changing the timer duration, see Custom Setting c3  
(Self-timer, 0 273). For information on setting a beep to sound during  
the timer count-down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 275).  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mirror up Mode  
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera  
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is  
recommended.  
1 Select mirror up mode.  
Press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the  
release mode dial to MUP.  
Release mode dial  
2 Raise the mirror.  
Frame the picture, focus, and then press  
the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down to raise the mirror.  
k
D Using the Viewfinder  
Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed  
in the viewfinder while mirror is raised.  
3 Take a picture.  
Press the shutter-release button all the  
way down again to take a picture. To  
prevent blurring caused by camera  
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly, or use  
an optional remote cord (0 356). The mirror lowers when  
shooting ends.  
A Mirror up Mode  
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for  
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
k
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
ISO Sensitivity  
– Reacting Faster to Light  
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher  
the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,  
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. This chapter  
describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically.  
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually...................................... 96  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.................................................. 98  
S
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing ISO Sensitivity  
Manually  
ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 3200  
in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV  
below ISO 200 and 0.3 to 1 EV above ISO 3200 are also available for  
special situations.  
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted  
by pressing the ISO button and  
rotating the main command  
dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the control panel or  
viewfinder.  
Main command  
dial  
ISO button  
S
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
ISO sensitivity: 3200  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The ISO Sensitivity Menu  
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the  
ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu  
(0 253).  
A ISO Sensitivity Settings  
The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom  
Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value, 0 270).  
Custom Setting b1  
(ISO sensitivity step value)  
ISO sensitivity settings available  
Lo 1, Lo 0.7, Lo 0.3, 200, 250, 320, 400,  
500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,  
2500, 3200, Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1  
1/3 step  
Lo 1, Lo 0.5, 200, 280, 400, 560, 800,  
1100, 1600, 2200, 3200, Hi 0.5, Hi 1  
Lo 1, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1  
1/2 step  
1 step  
* If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step  
value is changed. If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the  
new step value, ISO sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting.  
S
A Hi 0.3–Hi 1  
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–1 EV  
over ISO 3200 (ISO 4000–6400 equivalent). Pictures taken at these  
settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion.  
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1  
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–  
1 EV below ISO 200 (ISO 160–100 equivalent). Use for larger apertures  
when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most  
cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended.  
A See Also  
For information on Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value), see  
page 270. For information on using the High ISO NR option in the  
shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 259.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity  
auto control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will  
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved  
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted  
appropriately when the flash is used).  
1 Select ISO sensitivity  
G button  
auto control.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Select ISO sensitivity  
settings in the shooting  
menu, highlight ISO  
sensitivity auto control, and press 2.  
2 Select On.  
S
Highlight On and press J (if  
Off is selected, ISO sensitivity  
will remain fixed at the value  
selected by the user).  
3 Adjust settings.  
The maximum value for auto  
ISO sensitivity can be selected  
using Maximum sensitivity  
(the minimum value for auto  
ISO sensitivity is automatically  
set to ISO 200; note that if the value selected for Maximum  
sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO  
sensitivity, the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will  
be used). In exposure modes e and g, sensitivity will only be  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed  
selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–1 s). Slower  
shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be  
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum  
sensitivity. Press J to exit when settings are complete.  
When On is selected, the control panel and  
viewfinder show ISO-AUTO. When sensitivity  
is altered from the value selected by the  
user, these indicators blink and the altered  
value is shown in the viewfinder.  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option  
in the shooting menu to reduce noise (see page 259). When a flash is  
used, the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor  
of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 281).  
Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO  
sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes  
(available with the built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400  
flash units), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter  
speeds.  
S
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V
Exposure  
– Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure  
This section describes the options available to control exposure,  
including metering, exposure mode, exposure lock, exposure  
compensation, and bracketing.  
Metering .................................................................................102  
Exposure Mode......................................................................104  
e: Programmed Auto............................................................................106  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .......................................................................108  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto....................................................................109  
h: Manual..................................................................................................111  
Z
Long Time-Exposures...........................................................114  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock.......................................................116  
Exposure Compensation......................................................118  
Bracketing...............................................................................120  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metering  
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The  
following options are available:  
Method  
Description  
Recommended in most situations. Camera meters a wide  
area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution  
of brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural  
results.  
a
3D color  
matrix II  
Camera meters entire frame but  
assigns greatest weight to 8-mm  
circle in center of viewfinder (if CPU  
lens is attached, area can be selected  
using Custom Setting b5, Center-  
Z
Center-  
weighted  
weighted area, 0 272). Classic meter  
Center-weighted  
for portraits. 1  
area 2  
Camera meters circle 3 mm (0.12 in.)  
in diameter (approximately 2% of  
frame). Circle is centered on current  
focus point, making it possible to  
meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU  
lens is used or if Auto-area AF is in  
b
Spot  
Z
Spot metering  
effect (0 76), camera will meter  
center focus point). Ensures that  
area 2  
subject will be correctly exposed,  
even when background is much brighter or darker. 1  
1 For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and  
maximum aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu (0 196).  
2 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To choose a metering method,  
rotate the metering selector until  
the desired mode is displayed.  
Metering selector  
A Matrix Metering  
Z
The metering method used is determined by the type of lens attached:  
• Type G and D lenses: Range information is included when determining  
exposure (3D color matrix metering II).  
• Other CPU lenses: Range information is not included when determining  
exposure (color matrix metering II).  
• Non-CPU lenses: Color matrix metering is available if focal length and  
maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data item in  
setup menu (see page 196; center-weighted metering is used if focal  
length or aperture is not specified).  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest  
weight in center-weighted metering, see Custom Setting b5 (Center-  
weighted area, 0 272). For information on making separate  
adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see  
Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0 272).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Mode  
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed  
and aperture when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available:  
programmed auto (e), shutter-priority auto (f), aperture-priority  
auto (g), and manual (h).  
Mode  
Description  
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots  
and in other situations in which there is little time  
to adjust camera settings.  
Programmed  
auto  
(0 106)  
e
f
g
h
Shutter-priority User chooses shutter speed; camera selects  
auto  
(0 108)  
aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur  
motion.  
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter  
speed for best results. Use to blur background for  
portraits or bring both foreground and  
background into focus for landscape shots.  
User controls both shutter speed and aperture.  
Set shutter speed to “A” for long time-  
exposures.  
Aperture-  
priority auto  
(0 109)  
Manual  
(0 111)  
Z
A Lens Types  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 340), lock  
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G  
lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode g (aperture-priority  
auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is  
automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0 342). The  
exposure mode indicator (e or f) in the control panel will blink and F  
will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To choose the exposure mode, press the I  
button and rotate the main command dial  
until the desired mode is displayed in the  
control panel or viewfinder.  
I button  
Main command  
dial  
A Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press and  
hold the depth-of-field preview button. The  
lens will be stopped down to the aperture value  
selected by the camera (modes e and f) or the  
value chosen by the user (modes g and h),  
allowing depth of field to be previewed in the  
viewfinder.  
Preview button  
A Custom Setting e4—Modeling Flash  
Z
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units  
that support the Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 348) will emit  
a modeling flash when the depth-of-field preview button is pressed.  
See page 289 for more information.  
A See Also  
See page 98 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control. For  
information on using the Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu  
for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds, see page 258. For  
information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter  
speed and aperture, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure  
cntrl., 0 270). For information on changing the roles of the main and  
sub-command dials, see Custom Setting f8 (Customize command  
dials > Change main/sub, 0 297).  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e: Programmed Auto  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and  
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal  
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for  
snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the  
camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. To take  
photographs in programmed auto:  
1 Select exposure mode e.  
I button  
Press the I button and rotate the  
main command dial until e is displayed  
in the viewfinder and control panel.  
Main command dial  
Z
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Shutter speed: 1/320 s; aperture: f/9  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Flexible Program  
In exposure mode e, different combinations of  
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by  
rotating the main command dial while the  
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).  
Rotate the command dial to the right for large  
apertures (small f-numbers) that blur  
background details or fast shutter speeds that  
“freeze” motion. Rotate the command dial to  
the left for small apertures (large f-numbers)  
that increase depth of field or slow shutter  
speeds that blur motion. All combinations  
produce the same exposure. While flexible  
program is in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears in  
the control panel. To restore default shutter  
Main command dial  
speed and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the asterisk  
is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.  
Z
Shutter speed: 1/2,500 s;  
aperture: f/2.8  
Shutter speed: 1/60 s;  
aperture: f/22  
A See Also  
See page 372 for information on the built-in exposure program.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the  
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the  
optimal exposure. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode f.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until f is  
displayed in the  
viewfinder and control  
panel.  
Main command dial  
2 Choose a shutter speed.  
Rotate the main command dial while the  
exposure meters are on to choose the  
desired shutter speed. Shutter speed can  
be set to “p” or to values between 30 s (q) and  
1/8,000 s (o). Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by  
blurring moving objects, fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.  
Z
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)  
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A See Also  
See page 380 for information on what to do if flashing “A” indicator  
appears in the shutter-speed displays.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera  
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the  
optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode g.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until g is  
displayed in the  
viewfinder and control  
panel.  
Main command dial  
2 Choose an aperture.  
Rotate the sub-  
command dial while  
the exposure meters  
are on to choose the  
desired aperture from  
values between the  
Z
Sub-command dial  
minimum and maximum for the lens. Small apertures (high f-  
numbers) increase depth of field (see page 105), bringing both  
foreground and background into focus. Large apertures (low  
f-numbers) soften background details in portraits or other  
compositions that emphasize the main subject.  
Small aperture (f/36)  
Large aperture (f/2.8)  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Z
A Non-CPU Lenses (0 342)  
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been  
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item  
in setup menu (0 196) when a non-CPU lens is  
attached, the current f-number will be  
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel,  
rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise  
the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with  
maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be read  
from the lens aperture ring.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
h: Manual  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and  
aperture. To take photographs in manual exposure mode:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode h.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until h  
is displayed in the  
viewfinder and  
Main command dial  
control panel.  
Z
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command  
dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to  
set aperture. Shutter speed can be set “p” or to values  
between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held open  
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A, 0 114).  
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and  
maximum values for the lens. Check exposure in the exposure  
indicators (see page 113), and continue to adjust shutter  
speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved.  
Sub-command dial  
Aperture  
Shutter speed  
Z
Main command dial  
3 Frame a  
photograph,  
focus, and  
Shutter speed: 1/250 s;  
aperture: f/8  
shoot.  
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need  
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set  
aperture.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Exposure Indicators  
The exposure indicators in the control panel and viewfinder show  
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current  
settings (if Lo or Hi is displayed in f or g modes, the indicators show the  
amount of under- or over-exposure). Depending on the option chosen  
for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0 270), the  
amount of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV,  
1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are  
exceeded, the displays will flash.  
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
A Reverse Indicators  
If (V) is selected for Custom Setting f11 (Reverse  
indicators, 0 299), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder, control  
panel, and information display are displayed with positive values on the  
left and negative values on the right. Select  
(W) to  
display negative values on the left and positive values on the right.  
Z
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Long Time-Exposures  
At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the  
shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure  
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or  
fireworks. A tripod and optional remote cord (0 356) are  
recommended to prevent blur.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level  
surface. If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to  
the camera. If you are not using a remote cord, choose On for  
Custom Setting d10 (Exposure delay mode, 0 278) to  
prevent blur when the camera shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
A Long Time-Exposures  
Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL3e battery or an  
optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while  
the shutter is open. Note that noise and distortion may be present  
in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the Long exp.  
NR option in the shooting menu (0 258).  
Z
2 Select exposure  
I button  
mode h.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until h  
is displayed in the  
viewfinder and control  
panel.  
Main command dial  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose a shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are active,  
rotate the main command dial until  
“A” appears in the shutter-speed  
displays. The exposure indicators do not appear when  
“A“ is selected.  
4 Press the shutter-release button all the way down.  
Press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote cord  
all the way down. The shutter will remain open while the  
shutter-release button is pressed.  
5 Release the shutter-release button.  
Remove your finger from the shutter-release button to record  
the photograph.  
Z
Shutter speed: 35 s; aperture: f/25  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering  
exposure.  
1 Select center-weighted or  
Metering selector  
spot metering (0 102).  
Matrix metering will not  
produce the desired results  
with autoexposure lock. If  
using center-weighted  
metering, select the center  
focus point with the multi  
selector (0 78).  
2 Lock exposure.  
Shutter-release  
button  
Position the subject in the selected  
focus point and press the shutter-  
release button halfway. With the  
Z
shutter-release button pressed halfway  
and the subject positioned in the focus  
point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock  
exposure (and focus, except in manual  
focus mode). Confirm that the in-focus  
AE-L/AF-L button  
indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder.  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L  
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Recompose the  
photograph.  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button  
pressed, recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
A Metered Area  
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a  
3-mm (0.12 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-  
weighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in an  
8-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.  
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed  
without altering the metered value for exposure:  
Z
Exposure mode  
Setting  
e
f
g
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 107)  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.  
Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure  
lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock is  
released).  
A See Also  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,  
0 273), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. For information on changing the role of the AE-L/AF-L button,  
see Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 296).  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value  
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker.  
In exposure mode h, only the exposure information shown in the  
exposure indicator is affected; shutter speed and aperture do not  
change.  
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button  
and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is  
displayed in the control panel or viewfinder.  
E button  
Main command dial  
Z
0 EV  
–0.3 EV  
+2.0 EV  
(E button pressed)  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure compensation can be set to values between –5 EV  
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV.  
In general, choose positive values to make the subject brighter,  
negative values to make it darker.  
–1 EV  
No exposure  
compensation  
+1 EV  
At values other than 0.0, the 0 at the center  
of the exposure indicators will flash and a E  
icon will be displayed in the control panel  
and viewfinder after you release the E  
button. The current value for exposure  
compensation can be confirmed in the  
exposure indicator by pressing the E  
button.  
Z
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure  
compensation to 0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when  
the camera is turned off.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background  
exposure and flash level.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for  
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp comp/fine tune,  
0 270). For information on making adjustments to exposure  
compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4  
(Easy exposure compensation, 0 271). For information on  
automatically varying exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting,  
see page 120.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bracketing  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active  
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,  
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is  
difficult to set exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance and  
there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each  
shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.  
❚❚Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:  
1 Select flash or  
G button  
exposure bracketing.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Select Custom Setting e5  
(Auto bracketing set) in  
the Custom Settings  
menu, highlight an  
Z
option, and press J.  
Choose AE & flash to vary  
both exposure and flash  
level, AE only to vary only  
exposure, or Flash only to  
vary only flash level.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the control panel.  
Number of shots  
Control panel  
Main command  
dial  
Fn button  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing indicator  
At settings other than zero, a M icon  
and exposure and flash bracketing  
indicator will be displayed in the  
control panel, and a E icon will blink in  
the viewfinder and control panel.  
Z
A See Also  
Changes to bracketing settings can be made using the Fn button  
(the default setting, see Custom Setting f5, Assign Fn button,  
0 292), the depth-of-field preview button (Custom setting f6,  
Assign preview button), 0 296), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom  
Setting f7, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 296). Note that some  
“button press” options can not be combined with options using  
“+dials.” The explanation that follows assumes that bracketing is  
assigned to the Fn button.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select an exposure increment.  
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose the exposure increment.  
Exposure increment  
Sub-command  
dial  
Control panel  
Fn button  
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen  
from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an  
increment of 1/3 EV are listed below.  
Control panel display  
No. of shots  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
0
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
+0.3/0/+0.7  
–0.3/–0.7/0  
0/+0.3  
0/–0.3  
Z
0/–0.3/+0.3  
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7  
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/  
+0.7/+1.0  
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/  
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3  
7
9
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see  
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0 270).  
For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is  
performed, see Custom Setting e7 (Bracketing order, 0 290).  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot  
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications  
to exposure are added to those made with exposure  
compensation (see page 118), making it possible to achieve  
exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV.  
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator  
will be displayed in the control panel. A segment will  
disappear from the indicator after each shot.  
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7  
Display after first shot  
Z
Exposure increment: Exposure increment: Exposure increment:  
0 EV –1 EV +1 EV  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the Fn button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero ( ) and M is no longer displayed in the control  
panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next time  
bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by  
performing a two-button reset (0 182), although in this case the  
bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing  
is activated.  
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting  
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing  
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. In other modes, one shot will be  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been  
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence  
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to  
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all  
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the  
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
Z
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture  
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed  
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for  
ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity auto control in modes e, f,  
and g, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum  
exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded.  
Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing (mode M), 0 290) can be used to  
change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in  
manual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash  
level together with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash  
level alone.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚White Balance Bracketing  
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with  
a different white balance. For more information on white balance,  
see page 133.  
1 Select white balance bracketing.  
Choose WB bracketing for Custom  
Setting e5 Auto bracketing set.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the control panel.  
Number of shots  
Z
Control panel  
WB bracketing  
indicator  
Fn button  
Main command  
dial  
At settings other than zero, a W icon and WB bracketing  
indicator will appear in the control panel.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select a white balance increment.  
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is  
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.  
White balance  
increment  
Sub-command  
dial  
Fn button  
Control panel  
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3  
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts  
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber  
(0 138). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are  
listed below.  
No. of White balance  
Control panel display  
shots increment  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
0
Z
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
1
1 B  
1 A  
1 B  
1 A  
1 B / 0 / 2 B  
1 A / 2 A / 0  
0 / 1 B  
0 / 1 A  
1 A, 1 B  
1 A, 1 B  
0 / 1 A / 1 B  
0 / 2 A / 1 A / 1 B / 2 B  
0 / 3 A / 2 A / 1 A /  
1 B / 2 B / 3 B  
0/4A/3A/2A/1A/  
1 B / 2 B / 3 B / 4 B  
7
9
1 A, 1 B  
1 A, 1 B  
A See Also  
See page 139 for a definition of “mired.”  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies  
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a  
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are  
added to the white balance adjustment made with white  
balance fine-tuning.  
If the number of shots in the  
bracketing program is greater than  
the number of exposures remaining,  
the exposure count displays in the  
control panel and viewfinder will  
flash and the shutter release will be  
disabled. Shooting can begin when a  
new memory card is inserted.  
Z
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the Fn button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed in the control  
panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next time  
bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by  
performing a two-button reset (0 182), although in this case the  
bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing  
is activated.  
Z
A White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF  
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.  
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-  
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 138). No  
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.  
In self-timer mode (0 91), the number of copies specified in the white-  
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released.  
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the  
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have  
been recorded.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ADL Bracketing  
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For  
more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 164.  
1 Select ADL bracketing.  
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom  
Setting e5 Auto bracketing set.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the control panel.  
Number of shots  
Z
Control panel  
ADL bracketing  
Fn button  
Main command  
dial  
indicator  
At settings other than zero, an V icon and ADL bracketing  
indicator will appear in the control panel. Choose two shots to  
take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another  
at a selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series  
of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and  
Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High (four shots),  
or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra High (five shots). If you  
choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select Active D-Lighting.  
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose Active D-Lighting.  
Sub-command  
dial  
Fn button  
Active D-Lighting is shown in the control panel.  
Control panel display  
Active D-Lighting  
Y
R
Q
P
Z
Auto  
Low  
Z
Normal  
High  
Extra high  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot according  
to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in  
effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the  
control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator  
after each shot.  
Z
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the Fn button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero. The program last in effect will be restored the  
next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled  
by performing a two-button reset (0 182), although in this case  
the bracketing program will not be restored the next time  
bracketing is activated.  
Z
A ADL Bracketing  
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting  
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing  
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. In other modes, one shot will be  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been  
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence  
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to  
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all  
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the  
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
r
White Balance  
– Keeping Colors True  
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of  
the light source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in  
the color of the light source, with the result that white objects  
appear white whether seen in the shade, direct sunlight, or under  
incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in film cameras, digital  
cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images  
according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white  
balance.” This chapter covers white balance settings.  
White Balance Options.........................................................134  
Fine-Tuning White Balance..................................................137  
Choosing a Color Temperature...........................................141  
Preset Manual ........................................................................142  
r
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White Balance Options  
For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that  
matches the light source before shooting. The following options  
are available:  
Option  
Colortemp. *  
Description  
White balance is adjusted  
3,500– automatically. For best results, use type  
8,000 K G or D lens. If built-in or optional flash  
fires, results are adjusted for flash.  
3,000 K Use under incandescent lighting.  
Use with:  
vAuto  
J Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
I
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in  
sports venues).  
Sodium-vapor lamps 2,700 K  
Warm-white  
3,000 K • Warm-white fluorescent lights.  
3,700 K • White fluorescent lights.  
fluorescent  
White fluorescent  
Cool-white  
4,200 K • Cool-white fluorescent lights.  
fluorescent  
Day white  
fluorescent  
5,000 K • Daylight white fluorescent lights.  
Daylight fluorescent 6,500 K • Daylight fluorescent lights.  
High temp.  
mercury-vapor  
• High color temperature light sources  
(e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).  
r
7,200 K  
H Direct sunlight  
Flash  
G Cloudy  
5,200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
5,400 K Use with built-in or optional flash.  
6,000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
8,000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
2,500– Choose color temperature from list of  
10,000 K values (0 141).  
N
M Shade  
K
Choose color temp.  
Use subject, light source, or existing  
photograph as reference for white  
L Preset manual  
—
balance (0 142).  
* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If  
the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance,  
choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance.  
White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the control panel.  
Control panel  
WB button  
Main command dial  
A The White Balance Menu  
White balance can also be adjusted using the  
White balance option in the shooting menu  
(0 253).  
A I (Fluorescent)  
Selecting I (fluorescent) with the WB button and main command dial  
selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white  
balance menu (0 253).  
r
A Studio Flash Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large  
studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to  
Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.  
A See Also  
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto  
bracketing set, 0 289), the camera will create several images each time  
the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each image,  
“bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See page  
120 for more information.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other  
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a  
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an  
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the  
neighborhood of 5,000–5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower  
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly  
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear  
tinged with blue.  
r
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in  
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast  
into an image. White balance is fine tuned using the White  
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB  
button and rotating the sub-command dial.  
❚❚The White Balance Menu  
1 Select a white balance G button  
option.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Select White balance in  
the shooting menu, then  
highlight a white balance  
option and press 2. If an option other than Fluorescent,  
Choose color temp., or Preset manual is selected, proceed to  
Step 2. If Fluorescent is selected, highlight a lighting type and  
press 2. If Choose color temp. is selected, highlight a color  
temperature and press 2. If Preset manual is selected,  
choose a preset as described on page 150 before proceeding.  
r
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Fine tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-  
tune white balance. White  
balance can be fine tuned on  
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and  
the green (G)–magenta (M)  
axis. The horizontal (amber-  
Coordinates Adjustment  
blue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each  
increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (green-  
magenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding  
color compensation (CC) filters.  
Green (G)  
Increase green  
Blue (B)  
Amber (A)  
Increase magenta  
Increase blue  
Magenta (M)  
Increase amber  
r
3 Press J.  
Press J to save settings and return to  
the shooting menu. If white balance  
has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a  
E icon will be displayed in the control  
panel.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A White Balance Fine Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For  
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as  
J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs  
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
A Color Temperature Fine-Tuning  
When Choose color temp. is selected, you can  
view the color temperature while fine-tuning  
white balance.  
A “Mired”  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in  
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color  
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much  
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by  
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of  
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is  
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:  
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired  
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired  
r
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚The WB Button  
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset  
manual), the WB button can be used to fine-tune white balance on  
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 138; to fine-tune white balance  
when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on  
page 137). Six settings in both directions are available; each  
increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (0 139). Press the WB  
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is  
displayed in the control panel. Rotating the sub-command dial to  
the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the sub-  
command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At  
settings other than 0, a E icon appears in the control panel.  
Control panel  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
r
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing a Color Temperature  
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color  
temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the sub-command dial. The color temperature is  
displayed in the control panel:  
Control panel  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
r
D Choose Color Temperature  
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or  
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these  
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the  
selected value is appropriate.  
A The White Balance Menu  
Color temperature can also be selected in the  
white balance menu. Note that the color  
temperature with the WB button and the sub-  
command dial replaces the value selected in the  
white balance menu.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance  
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for  
light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available  
for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under  
Direct measurement lighting that will be used in final photograph and  
white balance is measured by camera (0 144).  
Copy from existing  
photograph  
White balance is copied from photo on memory  
card (0 148).  
r
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in  
presets d-0 through d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to  
any white balance preset (0 152).  
d-0  
Stores last value measured for  
white balance (0 144). This  
preset is overwritten when a  
new value is measured.  
d-1–d-4  
Store values copied from d-0 (0 147).  
Store values copied  
from images on  
memory card (0 148).  
r
A White Balance Presets  
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks  
(0 254). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to  
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank  
(no warning is displayed for preset d-0).  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Measuring a Value for White Balance  
1 Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will  
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard  
gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that  
exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring  
white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust exposure so that  
the exposure indicator shows 0 (0 113).  
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).  
Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until  
L is displayed in the control panel.  
Control panel  
WB button  
Main command dial  
3 Select direct measurement mode.  
r
Release the WB button briefly and then  
press the button until the L icon in  
the control panel starts to flash. A  
flashing D will also appear in the  
control panel and viewfinder. The  
displays will flash for about six seconds.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the  
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and  
press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera  
will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset  
d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be  
measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.  
5 Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a  
value for white balance, C will flash  
in the control panel for about six  
seconds, while the viewfinder will show  
a flashing a.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the  
camera may be unable to measure  
white balance. A flashing b a will  
appear in the control panel and  
r
Control panel  
viewfinder for about six seconds. Press  
the shutter-release button halfway to  
return to Step 4 and measure white  
balance again.  
Viewfinder  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Select preset d-0.  
If the new value for preset white balance will be used  
immediately, select preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is displayed in the  
control panel.  
D Direct Measurement Mode  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct  
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2  
(Auto meter-off delay, 0 273).  
A Preset d-0  
r
The new value for white balance will be stored  
in preset d-0, automatically replacing the  
previous value for this preset (no confirmation  
dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be  
displayed in the preset white balance list  
(0 147).  
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has  
been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance  
will be set to a color temperature of 5,200 K, the same as Direct  
sunlight). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until  
white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the  
other presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five  
white balance values can be stored (0 147).  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4  
Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white  
balance from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1–d-4).  
1 Select L (Preset  
G button  
manual).  
Press the G button and  
select White balance in  
the shooting menu.  
Highlight Preset manual  
and press 2.  
2 Select a destination.  
Highlight the destination  
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press  
the center of the multi  
selector.  
3 Copy d-0 to the selected  
preset.  
r
Highlight Copy d-0 and press  
J. If comment has been  
created for d-0 (0 152), the  
comment will be copied to  
the comment for the selected preset.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an  
existing photograph to a selected preset (d-1–d-4 only). Existing  
white balance values can not be copied to preset d-0.  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the  
white balance menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a destination.  
Highlight the destination  
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press  
the center of the multi selector.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and  
press 2.  
r
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Highlight a source image.  
Highlight the source image.  
To view the highlighted  
image full frame, press  
and hold the X button.  
X button  
To view images in other  
locations, press W and  
select the desired card  
and folder (0 217).  
W button  
5 Copy white balance.  
Press the center of the multi selector to copy  
the white balance value for the highlighted  
r
photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted  
photograph has a comment (0 303), the comment will be  
copied to the comment for the selected preset.  
A Choosing a White Balance Preset  
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance  
preset (d-0–d-4) and press 2 to select another  
preset.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Selecting a White Balance Preset  
To set white balance to a preset value:  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the  
white balance menu and press  
2.  
2 Select a preset.  
Highlight the desired preset  
and press the center of the  
multi selector. To select the  
highlighted preset and display  
fine tuning menu (0 138)  
without completing the next  
step, press J instead of  
pressing the center of the multi selector.  
3 Select Set.  
Highlight Set and press 2.  
Fine tuning menu for the  
selected white balance preset  
is displayed (0 138).  
r
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button  
At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by  
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. The  
current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is  
pressed.  
Control panel  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
r
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Entering a Comment  
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to  
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the  
white balance menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a preset.  
Highlight the desired preset  
and press the center of the  
multi selector.  
3 Select Edit comment.  
Highlight Edit comment and  
press 2.  
r
4 Edit the comment.  
Edit the comment as described on page  
255.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J
Image Enhancement  
This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening, contrast,  
brightness, saturation and hue using Picture Controls, how to  
preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D-Lighting,  
and how to choose a color space.  
Picture Controls .....................................................................154  
Creating Custom Picture Controls...................................................160  
Active D-Lighting ..................................................................164  
Color Space.............................................................................166  
J
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture Controls  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share  
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,  
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and  
software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. Choose a  
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.  
Option  
Description  
Standard processing for balanced results.  
Recommended for most situations.  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for  
photographs that will later be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
Q Standard  
R Neutral  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.  
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary  
colors.  
S Vivid  
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
1 Select Set Picture  
G button  
Control.  
J
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Set Picture  
Control in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
2 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture  
Control and press J.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset  
Picture Controls. Custom Picture Controls are created through  
modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture  
Control option in the shooting menu (0 160). Custom Picture Controls  
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D300S cameras  
and compatible software (0 163).  
A Optional Picture Controls  
Additional optional Picture Controls are available for download from  
Nikon websites.  
A The Picture Control Indicator  
The current Picture Control is shown in the  
information display when the R button is  
pressed.  
Picture Control  
indicator  
J
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls  
(0 160) can be modified to suit the scene or  
the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced  
combination of settings using Quick adjust,  
or make manual adjustments to individual  
settings.  
1 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture  
Control in the Set Picture  
Control menu (0 154) and  
press 2.  
2 Adjust settings.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the  
desired setting and press 4 or  
2 to choose a value (0 157).  
Repeat this step until all  
settings have been adjusted, or  
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of  
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O  
button.  
J
3 Press J.  
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls  
Picture Controls that have been modified from  
default settings are indicated by an asterisk  
(“U”) in the Set Picture Control menu.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or  
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control  
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For  
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes  
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,  
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.  
Quick adjust  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust  
sharpening automatically according to the type of  
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no  
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the  
sharpening).  
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to  
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3  
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in  
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct  
Contrast  
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty  
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).  
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced  
brightness. Does not affect exposure.  
Brightness  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust  
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,  
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values  
Saturation  
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).  
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make  
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more  
J
Hue  
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more  
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome  
photographs. Choose from Off, yellow, orange, red, and  
green (0 158).  
Filter  
effects  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from  
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted  
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,  
Toning  
Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 159).  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Active D-Lighting  
Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting  
(0164) is on. Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost  
when Active D-Lighting is turned on.  
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary  
with exposure and the position of the subject in  
the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best  
results. The icons for Picture Controls that use  
auto contrast and saturation are displayed in  
green in the Picture Control grid, and lines  
appear parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A The Picture Control Grid  
Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a  
Picture Control grid showing the contrast and  
saturation for the selected Picture Control in  
relation to the other Picture Controls (only  
contrast is displayed when Monochrome is  
selected). Release the W button to return to  
the Picture Control menu.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the Picture  
Control setting menu indicates the previous  
value for the setting. Use this as a reference  
when adjusting settings.  
J
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on  
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Description  
Y
O
R
G
Yellow  
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of  
Orange the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more  
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.  
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Red  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced  
than those produced by physical glass filters.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays  
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust  
saturation. Saturation control is not available  
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as  
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.  
J
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified  
and saved as custom Picture Controls.  
1 Select Manage Picture G button  
Control.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Manage  
Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and  
press 2.  
2 Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press  
2.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight an existing Picture  
Control and press 2, or press J  
to proceed to step 5 to save a  
copy of the highlighted Picture  
Control without further  
J
modification.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Edit the selected Picture  
Control.  
See page 157 for more  
information. To abandon any  
changes and start over from  
default settings, press the O  
button. Press J when settings  
are complete.  
5 Select a destination.  
Choose a destination for the  
custom Picture Control (C-1  
through C-9) and press 2.  
6 Name the Picture  
Control.  
Keyboard  
area  
The text-entry dialog shown  
at right will be displayed. By  
default, new Picture  
Name area  
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned  
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control.  
This name can be edited to create a new name of up to 19  
characters as described on page 255.  
J
The new Picture Control will appear in  
the Picture Control list.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any  
time using the Rename option in the Manage  
Picture Control menu.  
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture  
Control menu can be used to delete selected  
custom Picture Controls when they are no  
longer needed.  
A The Original Picture Control Icon  
The original preset Picture Control on which the  
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by  
an icon in the top right corner of the edit  
display.  
Original Picture  
Control icon  
J
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility  
available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2  
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or  
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to  
the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software  
and then deleted when no longer needed (if two memory cards  
are inserted, the card in the primary slot will be used; 0 72).  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from  
the memory card, or to delete custom Picture  
Controls from the memory card, highlight  
Load/Save in the Manage Picture Control  
menu and press 2. The following options will  
be displayed:  
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory  
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera  
and name them as desired.  
• Delete from card: Delete selected  
custom Picture Controls from the  
memory card. The confirmation  
dialog shown at right will be  
displayed before a Picture Control  
is deleted; to delete the selected  
Picture Control, highlight Yes and  
J
press J.  
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from  
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the  
memory card.  
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at  
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created  
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the  
camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,  
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast  
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor  
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded  
subjects on a sunny day.  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting: YAuto  
Active D-Lighting: P High  
J
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To use active D-Lighting:  
1
Select Active D-Lighting  
To display the menus, press  
the button. Highlight  
.
G button  
G
Active D-Lighting in the  
shooting menu and press  
2.  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight YAuto, Z Extra  
high, P High, Q Normal,  
R Low, or Off and press J. If  
YAuto is selected, the  
camera will automatically  
adjust Active D-Lighting according to shooting conditions (in  
exposure mode h, however, YAuto is equivalent to  
Q Normal).  
D Active D-Lighting  
Matrix metering is recommended (0 102). When Active D-Lighting is on,  
noise (graininess, banding, and mottling) may appear in photographs  
taken at high ISO sensitivities and additional time is required to record  
images. The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings (0 157)  
can not be adjusted while active D-Lighting is in effect.  
J
D “Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure  
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting  
option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after  
shooting.  
A See Also  
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto  
bracketing set, 0 289), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a  
series of shots. See page 129 for more information.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Space  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color  
reproduction. Choose a color space according to how photographs  
will be processed on leaving the camera.  
Option  
W sRGB  
Description  
Choose for photographs that will be printed or  
used “as is,” with no further modification.  
This color space is capable of expressing a wider  
gamut of colors than sRGB, making it the preferred  
choice for images that will be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
X Adobe RGB  
1 Select Color space.  
G button  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Color space in  
the shooting menu and  
press 2.  
2 Select a color space.  
Highlight the desired option  
and press J.  
J
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Color Space  
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the  
numeric values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB  
color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically  
used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended  
when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or  
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when  
taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct  
printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other  
commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed  
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and  
DCF 2.0 compliant; applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and  
DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space automatically. If the  
application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0, select the  
appropriate color space manually. An ICC color profile is embedded in  
TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space, allowing  
applications that support color management to automatically select  
the correct color space. For more information, see the documentation  
provided with the application or device.  
A Nikon Software  
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically  
select the correct color space when opening photographs created with  
the D300S.  
J
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
Flash Photography  
– Using the Built-in Flash  
This chapter describes how to use the built-in flash.  
The Built-in Flash...................................................................170  
Using the Built-in Flash ........................................................171  
Flash Modes............................................................................175  
Flash Compensation .............................................................177  
FV Lock ....................................................................................178  
l
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash has a Guide Number (GN) 17/56 (m/ft., ISO 200,  
20 °C/68 °F). It supports i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR,  
which uses monitor pre-flashes to adjust flash output for balanced  
lighting not only when natural lighting is inadequate but when  
filling in shadows and backlit subjects or adding a catch light to  
the subject’s eyes. The following types of i-TTL flash control are  
supported:  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible  
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.  
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range  
information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for  
natural balance between main subject and ambient background  
lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance information is included  
when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be increased  
for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum  
aperture; see 0 195). Not available when spot metering is used.  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in  
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into  
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized  
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is  
used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when  
spot metering is selected.  
l
D ISO Sensitivity  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and  
3200. At values over 3200 or under 200, the desired results may not be  
achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Built-in Flash  
Follow these steps when using the built-in flash.  
1 Choose a metering method  
Metering selector  
(0 102).  
Select matrix or center-weighted  
metering to activate i-TTL balanced fill-  
flash for digital SLR. Standard i-TTL flash  
for digital SLR is activated automatically  
when spot metering is selected.  
2 Press the flash pop-up button.  
The built-in flash will pop up and begin  
charging. When the flash is fully  
charged, the flash-ready indicator (c)  
will light.  
Flash pop-up button  
3 Choose a flash mode.  
Press the M button and rotate  
the main command dial until  
the desired flash mode icon is  
displayed in the control panel  
(0 175).  
l
Main command  
dial  
M button  
Control panel  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Check exposure (shutter speed and aperture).  
Press the shutter-release button halfway and check shutter  
speed and aperture. The settings available when the built-in  
flash is raised are listed below.  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
Set automatically by camera  
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2  
Aperture  
See page  
e
106  
Set automatically  
by camera  
Value selected by user  
f
g
h
108  
109  
111  
(1/250 s–30 s) 2  
Set automatically by camera  
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2  
Value selected  
by user 3  
Value selected by user  
(1/250 s–30 s, A) 2  
1
2
Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain  
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.  
Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional SB-900, SB-800,  
and SB-600 flash units when 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is  
selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 281).  
3
Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. Consult table of  
flash ranges (0 174) when setting aperture in g and h modes.  
The effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the  
depth-of-field preview button to emit a modeling preflash  
(0 289).  
5 Take the picture.  
l
Compose the photograph, focus, and shoot. If the flash-ready  
indicator (M) blinks for about three seconds after the  
photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full output and the  
photograph may be underexposed. Check the results in the  
monitor. If the photograph is underexposed, adjust settings  
and try again.  
A See Also  
See page 282 for information on 1/320 s (Auto FP).  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use,  
press it gently downward until the latch  
clicks into place.  
D The Built-in Flash  
Use with lenses with focal lengths of 16–300 mm (0 344). Remove lens  
hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm  
(2 ft.) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.  
If the flash fires in continuous release mode (0 88), only one picture will  
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it  
has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used  
again after a short pause.  
A See Also  
See page 178 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered  
subject before recomposing a photograph.  
l
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1  
(Flash sync speed, 0 281). For information on choosing the slowest  
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2  
(Flash shutter speed, 0 282). For information on flash control and  
using the built-in flash in commander mode, see Custom Setting e3  
(Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 283).  
See page 347 for information on using optional flash units. For  
information on the range of the built-in flash, see page 174.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
The range of the built-in flash varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency)  
and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Range  
200  
1.4  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
400  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
800  
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
1600  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
—
3200  
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
—
—
—
m
ft.  
1.0–12.0  
0.7–8.5  
0.6–6.1  
0.6–4.2  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.8  
3ft. 3in.–39ft. 4in.  
2ft. 4in.–27ft. 11in.  
2ft.–20ft.  
2ft.–13ft. 9in.  
2ft.–9ft. 10in.  
2ft.–6ft. 11in.  
2ft.–4ft. 11in.  
2ft.–3ft. 7in.  
2ft.–2ft. 7in.  
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft.).  
In programmed auto exposure mode (mode e), the maximum aperture  
(minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown  
below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
200  
400  
800  
1600  
3200  
3.5  
4
5
5.6  
7.1  
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture  
is stopped down by half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens  
is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the  
maximum aperture of the lens.  
l
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Modes  
The D300S supports the following flash modes:  
Flash mode  
Description  
This mode is recommended for most situations. In  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,  
shutter speed will automatically be set to values  
between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s when an optional  
flash unit is used with Auto FP High-Speed Sync; 0 281).  
Red-eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one  
second before main flash. Pupils in subject’s eyes  
contract, reducing “red-eye” effect sometimes caused by  
flash. Owing to one-second shutter-release delay, this  
mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in  
other situations in which quick shutter response is  
required. Avoid moving camera while red-eye reduction  
lamp is lit.  
Front-curtain  
sync  
Red-eye  
reduction  
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for  
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.  
Available only in programmed auto and aperture-  
priority auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera  
shake.  
Red-eye  
reduction with  
slow sync  
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to  
capture both subject and background at night or under  
dim light. This mode is only available in programmed  
auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of  
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by  
camera shake.  
l
Slow sync  
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure  
mode, flash fires just before the shutter  
closes. Use to create effect of a stream of  
light behind moving objects. In programmed  
auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is  
used to capture both subject and background. Use of  
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by  
camera shake.  
Rear-curtain  
sync  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Flash Control Mode  
The information display shows the flash control mode for the built-in  
flash (Built-in) and for optional flash units attached to the camera  
accessory shoe (Optional) as follows:  
Auto aperture (AA) 1  
non-TTL auto flash (A)  
/
i-TTL  
Manual  
Built-in Optional Built-in Optional Built-in Optional  
TTL 2  
—
Auto FP (0 281)  
Repeating flash 2  
Commander mode 2  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 Available with SB-900 and SB-800 only.  
2 Flash control mode for built-in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3  
(Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 283).  
D See Also  
See Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 281) for information on  
flash sync speeds as fast as 1/320 s.  
l
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Compensation  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to  
+1EV in increments of 1/3EV, changing the brightness of the main  
subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased  
to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent  
unwanted highlights or reflections.  
Press the Y button and rotate  
the sub-command dial until the  
desired value is displayed in the  
control panel. In general, choose  
positive values to make the main  
subject brighter, negative values  
to make it darker.  
Y (M) button Sub-command  
dial  
At values other than 0.0, a Y  
icon will be displayed in the control panel and  
viewfinder after you release the Y button.  
The current value for flash compensation can  
be confirmed by pressing the Y button.  
0 EV  
Normal flash output can be restored by  
setting flash compensation to 0.0. Flash  
compensation is not reset when the camera is  
turned off.  
(Y button pressed)  
–0.3 EV  
l
+1.0 EV  
A Optional Flash Units  
Flash compensation is also available with optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,  
SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units. The SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 also allow  
flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available when  
setting flash compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp comp/fine  
tune, 0 270).  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to  
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that  
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is  
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted  
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture.  
To use FV lock:  
1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button.  
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f5  
(Assign Fn button > Fn button press,  
0 292).  
2 Press the flash pop-up button.  
The built-in flash will pop up and begin  
charging.  
Flash pop-up  
button  
3 Focus.  
l
Position the subject in the  
center of the frame and press  
the shutter-release button  
halfway to focus.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Lock flash level.  
After confirming that the flash ready  
indicator (M) is displayed in the  
viewfinder, press the Fn button. The  
flash will emit a monitor preflash to  
determine the appropriate flash level.  
Flash output will be locked at this level  
and FV lock icons (e) will appear in the  
control panel and viewfinder.  
Fn button  
5 Recompose the photograph.  
6 Take the photograph.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without  
releasing FV lock.  
l
7 Release FV lock.  
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock  
icons (e) are no longer displayed in the control panel and  
viewfinder.  
D Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash  
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for  
Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 283).  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units  
FV lock is also available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and  
SB-R200 flash units (available separately). Set the optional flash to TTL  
mode (the SB-900 and SB-800 can also be used in AA mode; see the  
flash manual for details). While FV lock is in effect, flash output will  
automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position.  
When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl  
for built-in flash, 0 283), FV lock can be used with remote SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units if (a) any of the built-in flash, flash  
group A, or flash group B is in TTL mode, or (b) a flash group is  
composed entirely of SB-900 and SB-800 flash units in TTL or AA mode.  
A Metering  
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as  
follows:  
Flash unit  
Flash mode  
i-TTL  
AA  
i-TTL  
AA  
Metered area  
4-mm circle in center of frame  
Area metered by flash exposure meter  
Entire frame  
Stand-alone flash unit  
Used with other flash  
units (Advanced  
Wireless Lighting)  
Area metered by flash exposure meter  
A (master flash)  
A See Also  
For information on using the depth-of-field preview or AE-L/AF-L button  
for FV lock, see Custom Setting f6 (Assign preview button, 0 296) or  
Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 296).  
l
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
t
Other Shooting Options  
This chapter covers restoring default settings, making multiple  
exposures, interval timer photography, and using GPS units and  
non-CPU lenses.  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings................182  
Multiple Exposure .................................................................184  
Interval Timer Photography................................................189  
Non-CPU Lenses ....................................................................195  
Using a GPS Unit....................................................................198  
t
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring  
Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below  
can be restored to default values  
by holding the QUAL and E  
E button  
buttons down together for more  
than two seconds (these  
buttons are marked by a green  
dot). The control panel turns off  
briefly while settings are reset.  
QUAL button  
Option  
Focus point  
Default  
Center  
Option  
Bracketing  
Default  
Off 2  
Programmed  
auto  
Front-curtain  
sync  
Exposure mode  
Flash mode  
Flexible program  
Exposure  
compensation  
Off  
Flash  
compensation  
FV lock  
Multiple exposure  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
AE hold  
Off 1  
1 Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 296) is unaffected.  
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV  
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is  
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.  
t
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only  
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu  
bank option will be reset (0 254). Settings in the remaining banks  
are unaffected.  
Option  
Image quality  
Image size  
Default  
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Option  
White balance  
ISO sensitivity  
Default  
Auto *  
200  
* Fine-tuning off.  
If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings  
for the Picture Control will also be restored.  
t
A See Also  
See page 368 for a list of default settings.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiple Exposure  
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures  
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can be recorded at any  
image quality setting, and produce results with colors noticeably  
better than photographs combined in an imaging application  
because they make use of RAW data from the camera image  
sensor.  
❚❚Creating a Multiple Exposure  
Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple  
exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are  
performed for 30 s.  
A Extended Recording Times  
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, select On for the  
Image review (0 251) option in the playback menu and extend the  
monitor-off delay for image review using Custom Setting c4 (Monitor  
off delay, 0 274). The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s  
longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4.  
1 Select Multiple  
G button  
exposure.  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Multiple  
exposure in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
t
2 Select Number of shots.  
Highlight Number of shots  
and press 2.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select the number of shots.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the  
number of exposures that will  
be combined to form a single  
photograph and press J.  
4 Select Auto gain.  
Highlight Auto gain and press  
2.  
5 Set gain.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J.  
Option  
Description  
Gain adjusted according to number of exposures  
actually recorded (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for  
2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).  
On  
Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.  
Recommended if background is dark.  
Off  
t
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J. A  
n icon will be displayed in the  
control panel. To exit without  
taking a multiple exposure,  
select Multiple  
exposure > Reset in the  
shooting menu.  
7 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-  
speed release modes (0 86), the camera records all  
exposures in a single burst. In other release modes, one  
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button  
is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been  
recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple exposure  
before all photographs are recorded, see page 188).  
The n icon will blink until shooting  
ends. When shooting ends, multiple  
exposure mode will end and the n icon  
will no longer be displayed. Repeat  
steps 1–7 to take additional multiple exposures.  
t
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Multiple Exposure  
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple  
exposure.  
Live view (0 47) can not be used to record multiple exposures.  
The information listed in the playback photo information display  
(including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot  
in the multiple exposure.  
If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off  
during playback or menu operations, shooting will end and a multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to  
that point.  
A Interval Timer Photography  
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is  
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the  
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have  
been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting  
menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single  
photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting  
will end. Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting.  
A Other Settings  
While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be  
formatted and the following can not be changed: bracketing and  
shooting menu options other than White balance and Interval timer  
shooting (note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted  
before the first exposure is taken). The Lock mirror up for cleaning  
and Image Dust Off ref photo options in the setup menu can not be  
used.  
t
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Interrupting Multiple Exposures  
Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting  
menu while a multiple exposure is being  
recorded displays the options shown at right.  
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the  
specified number of exposures have been  
taken, highlight Cancel and press J. If  
shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have  
been taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the  
exposures that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is  
on, gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures  
actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if:  
• A two-button reset is performed (0 182)  
• The camera is turned off  
• The battery is exhausted  
• Pictures are deleted  
t
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at  
preset intervals.  
D Before Shooting  
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) or mirror-up (MUP) when  
using the interval timer. Before beginning interval timer photography,  
take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor.  
Remember that the camera will focus before each shot—no shots will  
be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.  
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup  
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time  
and date (0 29).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before  
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the  
battery is fully charged.  
1 Select Interval timer  
G button  
shooting.  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Interval timer  
shooting in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
2 Select a starting trigger.  
t
Highlight one of the following  
and press 2:  
• To start shooting about 3 s after  
settings are completed, select  
Now and proceed to Step 4.  
•
To choose a starting time, select Start time and proceed to Step 3.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose a start time.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours  
or minutes; press 1 or 3 to  
change. The starting time is  
not displayed if Now is  
selected for Choose start time.  
Press 2 to continue.  
4 Choose an interval.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight  
hours, minutes, or seconds;  
press 1 or 3 to change.  
Choose an interval longer than  
the slowest anticipated shutter  
speed. Press 2 to continue.  
5 Choose the number of  
intervals and number of  
shots per interval.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight  
number of intervals or number  
of shots; press 1 or 3 to  
change. Press 2 to continue.  
t
Number of Number Total  
intervals of shots/ number of  
interval shots  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Start shooting.  
Highlight Start > On and press  
J (to return to the shooting  
menu without starting the  
interval timer, highlight  
Start > Off and press J). The  
first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time,  
or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in  
Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all  
shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and  
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may  
vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being  
recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. If shooting  
can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter  
speed of A is currently selected in manual exposure mode  
or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
When taking photos  
DK-5 eyepiece cap  
without your eye to the  
viewfinder, remove the  
DK-23 rubber eyecup (q;  
you will need to hold the  
camera firmly) and cover  
the viewfinder with the  
supplied DK-5 eyepiece  
cap (w) to prevent light  
t
entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure.  
D Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no  
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0 193) after deleting some  
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.  
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer  
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the  
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots  
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is  
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take  
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies  
specified in the bracketing program.  
A During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the Q icon  
in the control panel will blink. Immediately  
before the next shooting interval begins, the  
shutter speed display will show the number of  
intervals remaining, and the aperture display  
will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. At  
other times, the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots  
in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button  
halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture  
will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off).  
To view current interval timer settings, select  
Interval timer shooting between shots. While  
interval timer photography is in progress, the  
interval timer menu will show the starting time,  
the shooting interval, and the number of  
intervals and shots remaining. None of these  
items can be changed while interval timer  
photography is in progress.  
t
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
Interval time photography can be paused by:  
• Pressing the J button between intervals  
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and  
pressing J  
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the  
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off)  
• Selecting self-timer (E) or mirror-up (MUP) release modes  
• Pressing the a button  
To resume shooting:  
1 Choose a new starting  
trigger.  
Choose a new starting trigger  
and start time as described on  
page 189.  
2 Resume shooting.  
Highlight Start > Restart and  
press J. Note that if interval  
timer photography was paused  
during shooting, any shots  
remaining in the current  
interval will be canceled.  
t
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is  
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:  
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu  
• Performing a two button reset (0 182)  
• Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu (0 256)  
• Changing bracketing settings (0 120)  
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.  
❚❚No Photograph  
Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet  
to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the  
camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera  
focuses again before each shot).  
A Release Mode  
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the  
specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high  
speed) mode, photographs will be taken at a rate of up to 7 shots per  
second. In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes,  
photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d5 (CL  
mode shooting speed, 0 276); in mode J, camera noise will be  
reduced.  
A Using the Monitor  
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be  
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor  
will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval.  
t
A Shooting Menu Banks  
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks  
(0 254). If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting  
menu item in the shooting menu (0 256), interval timer settings will be  
reset as follows:  
• Choose start time: Now  
• Interval: 00:01':00"  
• Number of shots: 1  
• Start shooting: Off  
• Number of intervals: 1  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Non-CPU Lenses  
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture),  
the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when  
using a non-CPU lens (0 342). If the focal length of the lens is  
known:  
• Power zoom can be used with SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 flash  
units (available separately)  
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo  
info display  
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and  
viewfinder  
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture  
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info  
display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the  
lens:  
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to  
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results  
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)  
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering  
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
t
A Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater  
than the actual focal length of the lens.  
A Zoom Lenses  
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.  
After changing the zoom position, select new values for lens focal  
length and maximum aperture.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
1 Select Non-CPU lens  
G button  
data.  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Non-CPU lens  
data in the setup menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a lens number.  
Highlight Lens number and  
press 4 or 2 to choose a lens  
number between 1 and 9.  
3 Select a focal length.  
Highlight Focal length (mm)  
and press 4 or 2 to choose a  
focal length between 6 and  
4,000 mm.  
4 Select a maximum  
aperture.  
Highlight Maximum aperture  
and press 4 or 2 to choose a  
t
maximum aperture between  
f/1.2 and f/22. The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the  
combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J.  
The specified focal length and  
aperture will be stored under  
the chosen lens number. This  
combination of focal length  
and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens  
number using camera controls as described below.  
❚❚Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls  
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera  
control.  
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “+command  
dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings  
menu. Non-CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the  
Fn button (Custom Setting f5, Assign Fn button, 0 292), the  
depth-of-field preview button (Custom Setting f6, Assign  
preview button, 0 296), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom  
Setting f7, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 296).  
2 Use the selected control to choose a lens number.  
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial  
until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel.  
Focal Maximum  
length aperture  
t
Lens number  
Main command dial  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a GPS Unit  
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,  
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated  
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each  
photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional GP-1  
GPS unit (see below; note that the GP-1 does not provide the  
compass heading), or with third-party units connected via an  
optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord (0 199).  
❚❚The GP-1 GPS Unit  
The GP-1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon  
digital cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the  
manual provided with the GP-1.  
t
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Other GPS Units  
Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of  
the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data  
format can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal  
using an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (available separately; 0 356).  
Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin  
geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector.  
These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub 9-  
pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device.  
See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the  
camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud).  
MC-35  
t
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚The kIcon  
When the camera establishes  
communication with a GPS device, a k icon  
will be displayed in the control panel. Photo  
information for pictures taken while the k  
icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data (0 214). GPS data  
are only recorded when the k icon is displayed; confirm that the k  
icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting (a flashing k  
icon indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal; pictures  
taken while the k icon is flashing will not include GPS data). If no  
data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the k icon  
will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS  
information.  
t
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Setup Menu Options  
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.  
• Auto meter off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will  
turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations  
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2  
(Auto meter-off delay). This reduces the drain on the  
battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if  
the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down  
without pausing.  
Enable  
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is  
connected; GPS data will always be recorded.  
Disable  
• Position: This item is only available if a GPS  
device is connected, when it displays the  
current latitude, longitude, altitude,  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and  
heading (if supported) as reported by the  
GPS device.  
A Heading  
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device  
is equipped with a digital compass (note that  
the GP-1 is not equipped with a compass).  
Keep the GPS device pointing in the same  
direction as the lens and at least 20cm (8 in.)  
from the camera.  
t
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the  
camera clock.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
t
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
More About Playback  
– Playback Options  
This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details  
the operations that can be performed during playback.  
Full-Frame Playback..............................................................204  
Photo Information ................................................................207  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback ..............216  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom...............................218  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................219  
Deleting Photographs..........................................................220  
I
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back,  
press the K button. The most  
recent photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
K button  
Multi selector  
Sub-command dial  
O button  
K button  
G button  
L button  
W button  
X button  
J button  
Main command dial  
A Rotate Tall  
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)  
photographs in tall orientation, select On for the  
I
Rotate tall option in the playback menu  
(0  
251). Note that because the camera itself is  
already in the appropriate orientation during  
shooting, images are not rotated automatically  
during image review (0 206)  
.
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press 2 to view photographs in order  
recorded, 4 to view photographs in  
reverse order.  
Viewadditional  
photographs  
View photo  
information  
Press 1 or 3 to view information about  
current photograph (0 207).  
View  
See page 216 for more information on the  
thumbnail display.  
See page 218 for more information on  
playback zoom.  
W
X
thumbnails  
Zoom in on  
photograph  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Press O again to delete photo.  
To protect image, or to remove protection  
Delete images  
O
Change  
protect  
status  
from protected image, press  
219).  
L
button  
L
(0  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be  
taken immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
See page 243 for more information.  
G
J
Retouch  
picture  
Create retouched copy of current  
photograph or movie (0 64, 315).  
If current picture is marked with 1 icon to  
show that it is a movie, pressing center of  
multi selector starts movie playback  
(0 63).  
Play movie  
I
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 251),  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s  
after shooting (because the camera is already in the correct orientation,  
images are not rotated automatically during image review). In single-  
frame, quiet shutter-release, self-timer, and mirror-up release modes,  
photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken. In  
continuous release mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the  
first photograph in the current series displayed.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when  
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off  
delay, 0 274).  
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the 1  
and 3 buttons display other images and the 4 and 2 buttons control  
photo information. See Custom Setting f4 (Photo info/playback,  
0 292) for details.  
I
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-  
frame playback. There are up to 9 pages of information for each  
photo. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown  
below. Note that shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights  
are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display  
mode (0 247; shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright  
information was recorded with the photograph as described on  
page 309). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used  
when the photo was taken.  
1/10  
1/10  
N
I
KON  
D300S  
.
LATITUDE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
º
35 36. 371'  
LONGITUDE  
E
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
ALTITUDE  
TIME(UTC)  
15/04/2009  
.
1
/
125 F5  
6
200  
35mm  
:
:
10 15 29  
º
HEADING  
:105. 07  
AUTO 0,  
0
20100D300S 10DSC_0001. JPG  
15 04 2009 10 : 15 : 29  
N
OR AL  
20100D300S  
_
NOR AL  
4288x2M848  
4288x2M848  
15  
/
04  
/
2009 10 : 15 : 29  
10DSC 0001. JPG  
N
I
KON  
D300S  
--  
100 1  
/
/
File information  
Overview data  
GPS data  
-
100  
1
Highlights  
,
,
Select R  
G
B
Highlights  
I
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
.
TR SPDD AP  
1
8000 F4  
8
E
MXP.  
M
O
E
, I S  
O
H
200  
:
:
ART I ST  
PYRI GHT  
NIKON TARO  
NIKON  
0. 0  
C
O
F
OCAL LE  
N
GT  
35–mm  
–
LE  
S
18 200 –  
3. 5 5.6  
A
FN VM  
R
S
V
–R  
O
n
+
.
FL  
A
S
H
O
D
E,  
,
,
Built i n TTL  
1
3
Highlights  
--  
SL  
O
W
100  
1
+
:
:
:
+
.
3
CMD  
M
TTL, 3. 0  
:
:
,
A
C
TTL  
0
B
O
FF  
OFF  
,
,
Select R  
G
B
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
--  
100 1  
100-1  
RGB histogram  
Shooting data pages 1–3  
Shooting data page 4  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚File Information  
1
2
3
4
5
1 Protect status .........................................219  
2 Retouch indicator .................................315  
3 Focus point 1, 2.......................................... 78  
4 AF area brackets 1..............................36, 52  
5 Frame number/total number of frames  
6 File name.................................................258  
7 Image quality........................................... 68  
8 Image size................................................. 71  
9 Image authentication ..........................308  
10 Time of recording.................................... 29  
11 Date of recording.................................... 29  
12 Current card slot ...................................... 72  
13 Folder name ...........................................256  
1/10  
13  
12  
6
7
_
20100D300S  
NOR AL  
4288x2M848  
10DSC 0001. JPG  
15  
/
04  
/2009 10 : 15 : 29  
11  
10  
9
8
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode (0 247).  
2 If photograph was taken in focus mode S, display shows point where focus first locked.  
In focus mode C, focus point is only displayed if single-point or dynamic area was  
selected for AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.  
I
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Highlights 1  
1
2
3
4
1 Protect status ........................................219  
2 Retouch indicator.................................315  
3 Image highlights 2  
-
100  
1
4 Folder number–frame number.........256  
5 Current channel 2  
6 Highlight display indicator  
Highlights  
6
5
,
,
Select R  
G
B
1
2
Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (0 247).  
Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be  
W button  
overexposed) for current channel. Press 4 or 2  
while pressing W button to cycle through channels  
as follows:  
RGB  
(all channels)  
R
(red)  
G
B
(green)  
(blue)  
I
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚RGB Histogram 1  
1 Image highlights 2.................................209  
2 Folder number–frame number .........256  
3 Protect status.........................................219  
4 Retouch indicator .................................315  
7
1
2
8
9
--  
1
Highlights  
100  
5 White balance........................................133  
Color temperature ................................141  
White balance fine-tuning .................137  
Preset manual........................................142  
3
10  
4
5
6
,
,
Select R  
G
B
6 Current channel 2  
7 Histogram (RGB channel) 3. In all  
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel  
brightness, vertical axis number of  
pixels.  
8 Histogram (red channel) 3  
9 Histogram (green channel) 3  
10 Histogram (blue channel) 3  
1
2
Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (0 247).  
Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be  
W button  
overexposed) for current channel. Press 4 or 2  
while pressing W button to cycle through channels  
as follows:  
RGB  
R
G
B
(all channels)  
(red)  
(green)  
(blue)  
Highlight display off  
I
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Some sample histograms are shown below:  
•
•
•
If the image contains objects with a wide  
range of brightnesses, the distribution of  
tones will be relatively even.  
If the image is dark, tone distribution will  
be shifted to the left.  
If the image is bright, tone distribution  
will be shifted to the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while  
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can  
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it  
difficult to see photographs in the monitor.  
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the  
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the  
X
and  
W
buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the  
image with the multi selector. The histogram will  
be updated to show only the data for the portion  
of the image visible in the monitor.  
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from  
those displayed in imaging applications.  
I
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 1 1  
1
2
4 Exposure mode......................................104  
ISO sensitivity 2 ........................................ 96  
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
.
1
8000 F4  
8
MXP.  
M
O
E
, I S  
O
H
200  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TR SPDD AP  
5 Exposure compensation .....................118  
E
Optimal exposure tuning 3 .................272  
0. 0  
F
OCAL LE  
N
GT  
35–mm  
–
LE  
S
FN VM  
R
18 200 –  
3. 5 5.6  
A
S
V
–R  
O
n
6 Focal length...................................195, 346  
7 Lens data.................................................195  
+ .  
FL  
A
S
H
O
D
E,  
,
,
Built i n TTL  
1
3
SL  
O
W
+
:
:
:
+
.
3
CMD  
M
TTL, 3. 0  
:
:
,
A
C
TTL  
0
10  
B
OFF  
OFF  
8 Focus mode.............................................. 74  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 4............ 26  
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
--  
1
100  
11  
12  
9 Flash mode .............................................171  
Flash compensation .............................177  
10 Commander mode/group name/flash  
control mode/flash compensation...285  
11 Camera name  
1 Protect status ........................................ 219  
2 Retouch indicator................................. 315  
3 Metering method................................. 102  
Shutter speed .............................. 108, 111  
Aperture ........................................ 109, 111  
12 Folder number–frame number .........256  
1
2
3
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 247).  
Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
Displayed if Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0 272) has been set to  
a value other than zero for any metering method.  
4
Displayed only if VR lens is attached.  
I
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 2 1  
1
2
4 Color space .............................................166  
5 Picture Control.......................................154  
6 Quick adjust 2 .........................................157  
:
:
3
4
HI TE BALANCE  
A
UTO, 0,  
0
WCO  
L
OR  
SPAC  
E
s
RGB  
Original Picture Control 3 ....................154  
5
PI  
C
TURE  
CTRL : ST  
A
N
DARD  
QUICK ADJUST : 0  
6
8
CO TRANNST  
S
H
A
RPE ING  
:
:
3
0
7
7 Sharpening.............................................157  
8 Contrast...................................................157  
9 Brightness...............................................157  
BRNI  
G
HT  
ESNS :0  
9
SA  
TUR  
A
TI  
O
:0  
:0  
10  
11  
H
UE  
10 Saturation 4.............................................157  
N
I
KON  
D300S  
--  
100  
1
12  
13  
Filter effects 5..........................................157  
11 Hue 4.........................................................157  
Toning 5....................................................157  
1 Protect status ........................................ 219  
12 Camera name  
2 Retouch indicator................................. 315  
13 Folder number–frame number .........256  
3 White balance ....................................... 133  
Color temperature................................ 141  
White balance fine-tuning................. 137  
Preset manual ....................................... 142  
1
2
3
4
5
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 247).  
Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only.  
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.  
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.  
Monochrome Picture Controls only.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 3 *  
1
2
1 Protect status.........................................219  
2 Retouch indicator .................................315  
3 High ISO noise reduction....................259  
Long exposure noise reduction.........258  
4 Active D-Lighting..................................164  
5 Retouch history .....................................315  
6 Image comment....................................303  
7 Camera name  
.
:
:
:
3
4
5
O
I SE RE  
D
U
C
H
N I ISO, NORM  
NAC  
T
D
L I GH  
T
O
R
A
L
.
–
.
D
LMMIG  
H
TI  
G
–
RET  
O
U
C
H
ARN FILTNER  
C
WY  
A
OTYPE  
TRI  
CO  
MM  
E
N
T
SPRMIN  
G
H
A
S
CO  
M
E
SP  
:
.
6
.
RI  
N
G
H
A
S
CO  
M
E
3636  
N
I
KON  
D300S  
--  
100 1  
7
8
8 Folder number–frame number .........256  
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 247).  
I
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Shooting Data Page 4 *  
1
2
1 Protect status.........................................219  
2 Retouch indicator .................................315  
3 Name of photographer .......................309  
4 Copyright holder...................................309  
5 Camera name  
:
:
3
4
ART I ST  
PYRI GHT  
NIKON TARO  
NIKON  
C
O
6 Folder number–frame number .........256  
N
I
KON  
D300S  
--  
100 1  
5
6
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 247) and copyright  
information was appended to photograph (0 309).  
❚❚GPS Data 1  
1
2
1 Protect status.........................................219  
2 Retouch indicator .................................315  
3 Latitude  
4 Longitude  
5 Altitude  
6 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
7 Heading 2  
8 Camera name  
.
LATITUDE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
3
4
º
35 36. 371'  
LONGITUDE  
E
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
ALTITUDE  
TIME(UTC)  
5
6
15/04/2009  
:
:
10 15 29  
º
HEADING  
:105. 07  
7
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
--  
100  
1
8
9
9 Folder number–frame number .........256  
1
2
Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (0 198).  
Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.  
I
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Overview Data  
1
2
3
5 Histogram showing the distribution of  
tones in the image (0 211). Horizontal  
axis corresponds to pixel brightness,  
vertical axis shows number of pixels of  
each brightness in image.  
1/10  
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
4
5
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
6
7
8
6 ISO sensitivity * ........................................ 96  
7 Focal length...................................195, 346  
8 GPS data indicator ................................198  
9 Image comment indicator..................303  
10 Flash mode .............................................171  
11 Flash compensation .............................177  
12 Exposure compensation .....................118  
13 Metering method .................................102  
14 Exposure mode......................................104  
15 Shutter speed ...............................108, 111  
16 Aperture.........................................109, 111  
,
.
1
8000 F4  
8
200  
SLOW  
35mm  
+
–
.
1
1. 3  
10000 B6,  
20100D300S  
0
M
1
L
11  
9
10  
_
N
OR AL  
15/04/2009 10 : 15 : 29  
4288x2M848  
10DSC 000. JPG  
1 Frame number/total number of frames  
2 Protect status ........................................ 219  
3 Camera name  
4 Retouch indicator................................. 315  
* Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
20 Image quality........................................... 68  
21 Image size................................................. 71  
22 Image authentication indicator ........308  
23 Time of recording.................................... 29  
24 Date of recording.................................... 29  
25 Current card slot ...................................... 72  
26 Folder number.......................................256  
27 White balance........................................133  
Color temperature ................................141  
White balance fine-tuning .................137  
Preset manual........................................142  
1/10  
N
I
KO  
N
D300S  
17  
18  
28  
27  
,
.
.
I 0  
1
8000 F4  
8
H
3
35mm  
+
–
.
1
1. 3  
10000 B6,  
20100D300S  
0
SLOW  
M
1
26  
19  
_
N
OR AL  
10DSC 0001. JPG  
15  
/
04/2009 10 : 15 : 29  
4288x2M848  
25 24  
23  
22  
21 20  
17 Picture Control * .................................... 154  
18 Active D-Lighting ................................ 165  
19 File name................................................ 258  
28 Color space .............................................166  
I
* -- is displayed if photo was taken using optional Picture Control (0 155) that is no  
longer stored in camera.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Multiple Images:  
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images,  
press the W button.  
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Display more  
images  
Press W button to increase number of  
images displayed.  
W
Press X button to reduce number of  
images displayed. When four images  
are displayed, press to view  
Display fewer  
images  
X
highlighted image full frame.  
Press center of multi selector to switch  
back and forth between full frame and  
thumbnail playback.  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Use multi selector to highlight images  
for full-frame playback, playback zoom  
(0 218), or deletion (0 220).  
Highlight images  
Delete  
See page 220 for more information.  
O
highlighted photo  
Change protect  
status of  
I
L
See page 219 for more information.  
highlighted photo  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can  
be taken immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
G
See page 243 for more information.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Choosing a Memory Card  
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select  
a memory card for playback by pressing the W  
button when 72 thumbnails are displayed. The  
dialog shown at right will be displayed;  
highlight the desired memory card slot and  
press 2 to display a list of folders, then highlight  
a folder and press J to view the pictures in the  
selected folder.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi  
selector, see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 291).  
I
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking a Closer Look:  
Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the current image. The following  
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Zoom in  
or out  
Press X to zoom in to  
X
/
W
maximum of approximately  
27 × (large images), 20 ×  
(medium images) or 13 ×  
(small images). Press W to  
zoom out. While photo is  
View  
other  
areas of  
image  
zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas of  
image not visible in monitor. Keep multi  
selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas  
of frame. Navigation window is displayed when  
zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in  
monitor is indicated by yellow border.  
View  
other  
images  
Rotate main command dial to view same  
location in other images at current zoom ratio.  
Faces (up to 10) detected  
during zoom are indicated by  
white borders in the  
navigation window. Rotate  
sub-command dial to scroll  
display to faces without  
changing zoom ratio.  
Select  
faces  
Change  
protect  
status  
L
See page 219 for more information.  
I
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
/
K
Display  
menus  
G
See page 243 for more information.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protecting Photographs from  
Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L button can  
be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion.  
Protected files can not be deleted using the O button or the  
Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images  
will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 34, 301).  
To protect a photograph:  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or  
highlight it in the thumbnail list.  
2 Press the L button.  
The photograph will be  
marked with a a icon. To  
remove protection from  
the photograph so that it  
can be deleted, display  
the photograph or  
L button  
highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the L  
button.  
I
A Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently  
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons  
together for about two seconds.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Photographs  
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or  
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete  
multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the current  
playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once  
deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that  
are protected or hidden can not be deleted.  
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback  
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.  
2 Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback  
To delete the photograph, press the O button  
again. To exit without deleting the  
photograph, press the K button.  
O button  
I
A See Also  
The After delete option in the playback menu  
determines whether the next or previous image is  
displayed after an image is deleted (0 251).  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following  
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some  
time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for  
Description  
R All  
playback (0 245). If two cards are inserted, you can select  
the card from which pictures will be deleted.  
❚❚Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1 Choose Selected.  
G button  
Press the G button and  
select Delete in the  
playback menu. Highlight  
Selected and press 2.  
2 Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a picture (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button; to  
view images in other locations,  
press W and select the desired card and folder as described  
on page 217).  
I
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select the highlighted  
picture.  
Press the center of the multi  
selector to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected  
pictures are marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select  
additional pictures; to deselect a picture, highlight it and press  
the center of the multi selector.  
4 Press J to complete the  
operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; highlight Yes and  
press J.  
I
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q
Connections  
– Connecting to External Devices  
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer,  
how to print pictures, and how to view them on a television set.  
Connecting to a Computer..................................................224  
Direct USB Connection........................................................................225  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks......................................................227  
Printing Photographs...........................................................228  
Connecting the Printer ........................................................................229  
Printing Pictures One at a Time ........................................................230  
Printing Multiple Pictures...................................................................233  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...........................................237  
Viewing Photographs on TV ...............................................239  
Standard Definition Devices..............................................................239  
High-Definition Devices......................................................................241  
Q
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Computer  
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to  
connect the camera to a computer. Before connecting the camera,  
install Nikon Transfer and ViewNX from the supplied Software  
Suite CD (see the Install Guide for more information). Nikon  
Transfer starts automatically when the camera is connected and is  
used to copy photographs to the computer, where they can be  
viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up  
photographs and embed information in photographs as they are  
transferred, while ViewNX can be used to sort photographs,  
convert images to different file formats, process NEF/RAW  
photographs, and modify NEF/RAW, TIFF, and JPEG images). To  
ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera  
battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use  
or use an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately).  
❚❚Supported Operating Systems  
The supplied software can be used with computers running the  
following operating systems:  
• Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home  
Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP  
Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/Professional)  
• Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, or 10.5.6)  
See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on  
supported operating systems.  
D Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface  
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
Q A Camera Control Pro 2  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; 0 355) can be used to  
control the camera from a computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is  
running, “c” will be displayed and the exposure indicator will blink in  
the control panel.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct USB Connection  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Turn the computer on.  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
3 Connect the USB cable.  
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt  
to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the  
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.  
4 Turn the camera on.  
Q
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Transfer photographs.  
Nikon Transfer will start automatically;  
click the Start Transfer button to  
transfer photographs (for more  
information on using Nikon Transfer,  
select Nikon Transfer help from the  
Nikon Transfer Help menu).  
Start Transfer button  
6 Turn the camera off.  
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when  
transfer is complete.  
D During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while  
transfer is in progress.  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use.  
Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
Q
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks  
If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter (0 352) is attached,  
photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or  
Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from  
network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available  
separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:  
Mode  
Function  
Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp  
server.  
Transfer mode  
Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before  
select mode upload.  
Control camera from computer using  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).  
PC mode  
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network  
Print mode  
computer.  
For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to  
update to the latest versions of the WT-4 firmware and supplied  
software.  
D Transfer Mode  
When Wireless transmitter > Mode > Transfer mode is selected in the  
camera setup menu, the J button is used during playback to select  
pictures for upload, preventing it from being used to select pictures for  
other operations, such as side-by-side comparison (0 331). To restore  
normal operation, select another option for Wireless transmitter >  
Mode.  
A Movies  
The WT-4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send  
or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings. Movies can not be  
uploaded in thumbnail selector mode.  
Q
A WT-4A/B/C/D/E  
The principal difference between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E is in the  
number of channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all references  
to the WT-4 also apply to the WT-4A/B/C/D/E.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Photographs  
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via direct  
USB connection, follow the steps below.  
Take photographs  
Select photographs for printing using  
Print set (DPOF) (0 237)  
Connect camera to printer (0 229)  
Print photographs  
Print multiple  
Create index prints  
one at a time (0 230) photographs (0 233)  
(0 236)  
Disconnect USB cable  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)  
(0 68) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 327).  
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC  
adapter. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB  
connection, set Color space to sRGB (0 166).  
Q
A See Also  
See page 384 for information on what to do if an error occurs during  
printing.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do  
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the  
cable via a USB hub.  
3 Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed  
by a PictBridge playback display.  
q
w
Q
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1 Select a picture.  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional  
pictures. Press 1 or 3 to view  
photo information (0 207), or  
press and hold the X button to  
zoom in on the current frame (0 218). To view six pictures at a  
time, press the W button. Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures, or press X to display the highlighted picture full  
frame.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge  
printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to  
choose page size (to print at  
Page size default page size for current  
printer, select Printer default),  
then press J to select and return  
to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to  
No. of choose number of copies  
Q
copies  
(maximum 99), then press J to  
select and return to previous  
menu.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Border  
Description  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to  
choose print style from Printer  
default (default for current  
printer), Print with border (print  
photo with white border), or No  
border, then press J to select  
and return to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to  
choose Printer default (default  
for current printer), Print time  
stamp (print time and date of  
recording on photo), or No time  
stamp, then press J to select  
and return to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. To exit without  
cropping picture, highlight No  
cropping and press J. To crop  
picture, highlight Crop and press  
2.  
Time stamp  
Cropping  
If Crop is selected, dialog shown  
at right will be displayed. Press X  
to increase size of crop, W to  
decrease. Choose position of  
crop using multi selector and  
press J.  
A Page Size, Border, Time Stamp, and Cropping  
Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Only  
options supported by the current printer can be selected. Note  
that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.  
Q
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press  
J to start printing. To cancel  
before all copies have been  
printed, press J.  
Q
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Multiple Pictures  
G button  
1 Display the PictBridge  
menu.  
Press the G button in the  
PictBridge playback display  
(see Step 3 on page 229).  
2 Choose Print select or Print  
(DPOF).  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press 2.  
• Print select: Select pictures  
for printing.  
• Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the  
Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu (0 237). The  
current print order will be displayed in Step 3.  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory  
card, select Index print. See page 236 for more information.  
Q
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures on the  
memory card. To display the  
current picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button.  
To select the current picture for  
printing, press the L button  
and press 1. The picture will  
be marked with a Z icon and  
the number of prints will be set  
to 1. Keeping the L button  
L button  
pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up to  
99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of prints  
is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures have been  
selected.  
4 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge  
printing options.  
Q
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an  
option and press 2 to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu of page size options will be displayed (0 230).  
Press 1 or 3 to choose page size (to print at default  
page size for current printer, select Printer default), then  
press J to select and return to previous menu.  
Page size  
Menu of border options will be displayed (0 231). Press  
1 or 3 to choose print style from Printer default  
Border (default for current printer), Print with border (print  
photo with white border), or No border, then press J to  
select and return to previous menu.  
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (0 231).  
Press 1 or 3 to choose Printer default (default for  
Time stamp current printer), Print time stamp (print time and date  
of recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J  
to select and return to previous menu.  
6 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.  
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press  
J.  
Q
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Creating Index Prints  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,  
select Index print in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (0 233).  
Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures,  
only the first 256 images will be printed.  
1 Select Index print.  
Highlight Index print in the  
PictBridge menu (0 233) and  
press 2.  
The confirmation dialog shown at right  
will be displayed.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Choose page size, border, and time  
stamp options as described on page 235  
(a warning will be displayed if the  
selected page size is too small).  
4 Start printing.  
Highlight Start printing and press J to  
start printing. To cancel before printing  
is complete, press J.  
Q
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to  
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and  
devices that support DPOF.  
1 Choose Select/set.  
G button  
Press the G button and  
select Print set (DPOF) in  
the playback menu.  
Highlight Select/set and  
press 2 (to remove all  
photographs from the  
print order, select Deselect all?).  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures on the  
memory card (to view images in  
other locations, press W and select  
the desired card and folder as  
described on page 217). To display  
the current picture in full screen,  
press and hold the X button. To  
select the current picture for  
L button  
printing, press the L button and  
press 1. The picture will be marked  
with a Z icon and the number of  
prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L button pressed, press  
1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect  
the picture, press 3 when the number of prints is 1). Press J  
when all the desired pictures have been selected.  
Q
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and  
press 2 to toggle the highlighted  
option on or off (to complete the print  
order without including this  
information, proceed to Step 4).  
• Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all  
pictures in print order.  
• Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print  
order.  
4 Complete the print order.  
Highlight Done and press J  
to complete the print order.  
D Print Set  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a  
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and  
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the  
current order (0 233). DPOF date and data imprint options are not  
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of  
recording on photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge  
Time stamp option.  
The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the  
memory card to store the print order.  
Q
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW; 0 68) can not be  
selected for printing using this option.  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a  
computer or other device after the print order is created.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (A/V) cable can be used to  
connect the D300S to a television or VCR for playback or recording.  
A type C mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)  
cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used  
to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
To connect the camera to a standard television:  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or  
disconnecting the A/V cable.  
2 Connect the supplied A/V cable as shown.  
Connect to  
camera  
Audio (white)  
Video (yellow)  
Connect to  
video device  
3 Tune the television to the video channel.  
Q
4 Turn the camera on and press K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed both on the  
television screen and in the camera monitor.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Video Mode  
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and that  
the option selected for Video mode (0 301) matches the video standard  
used in the TV.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately) is  
recommended for extended playback. When the EH-5a or EH-5 is  
connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at ten minutes  
and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically. Note  
that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a  
television screen.  
A Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for  
automated playback (0 252).  
A Audio  
When a movie with sound recorded in stereo using an external  
microphone is viewed on a television connected to the camera via an  
A/V cable, the audio output is monaural. HDMI connections support  
stereo output. Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the  
camera controls can not be used.  
Q
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-  
pin HDMI cable (available separately from commercial sources).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or  
disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to  
camera  
Connect to high-  
definition device  
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-  
definition television or monitor screen; the camera monitor  
will remain off.  
A Movies  
To display or hide a guide in the monitor when viewing movies on an  
HDMI device, press the R button.  
Q
A HDMI  
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the  
appropriate HDMI format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format  
can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu (0 302).  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
Menu Guide  
This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus.  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images .......................244  
C
The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options........................ 253  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings.........260  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup......................................300  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies........315  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu..............................333  
U
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DThe Playback Menu:  
ManagingImages  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K  
(playback menu) tab.  
G button  
Option  
0
Delete  
221  
245  
245  
247  
248  
251  
251  
251  
252  
237  
Playback folder  
Hide image  
Display mode  
Copy image(s)  
Image review  
After delete  
Rotate tall  
Slide show  
Print set (DPOF)  
U
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback.  
Option  
Description  
Pictures in all folders created with the D300S will be visible  
during playback.  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during  
playback.  
D300S  
All  
Current  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Hide Image  
Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden  
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be  
deleted by formatting the memory card.  
D Protected and Hidden Images  
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the  
image.  
G button  
1 Choose Select/set.  
Press the G button and  
select Hide image in the  
playback menu. Highlight  
Select/set and press 2 (to  
skip the remaining steps  
and reveal all pictures,  
highlight Deselect all? and press 2).  
U
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to  
scroll through the pictures on  
the memory card (to view the  
highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X  
button; to view images in other locations, press W and select  
the desired card and folder as described on page 217) and  
press the center of the multi selector to select the current  
picture. Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect  
a picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to complete the  
operation.  
U
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Display Mode  
Choose the information available in the playback photo information  
display ( 207).  
0
1 Select options.  
Press  
option, then press  
the option for the photo  
information display. A  
1
or  
3
to highlight an  
2
to select  
L
appears next to selected items;  
to deselect, highlight and press  
2.  
2 Save changes and exit.  
To return to the playback menu,  
highlight Done and press  
J.  
U
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Copy Image(s)  
Copy images between memory cards. This option is only available  
when two memory cards are inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Select source  
Select image(s)  
Description  
Select the card from which pictures will be copied.  
Select the pictures to be copied.  
Select destination folder Select the folder to which pictures will be copied.  
Copy image(s)?  
Copy the images.  
To copy images:  
1 Choose Select source.  
Highlight Select source and  
press 2.  
2 Select the source card.  
Highlight the slot containing  
the card from which images  
will be copied and press J.  
3 Choose Select image(s).  
Highlight Select image(s) and  
press 2.  
4 Select the source folder.  
Highlight the folder containing  
the images to be copied and  
press 2.  
U
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Make the initial selection.  
Before going on select or  
deselect individual images, you  
can mark all or all protected  
images in the folder for  
copying by choosing Select all  
images or Select protected images. To mark only  
individually selected images for copying, choose Deselect all  
before proceeding.  
6 Select additional images.  
Highlight pictures and press  
the center of the multi selector  
to select or deselect (to view  
the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X  
button). Selected images are marked with a L. Press J to  
proceed to Step 7 when your selection is complete.  
7 Choose Select destination  
folder.  
Highlight Select destination  
folder and press 2.  
8 Select a destination folder.  
To enter a folder number, choose Select  
folder by number, enter the number  
(0 256), and press J. If the folder with  
the selected number does not already  
exist, a new folder will be created.  
U
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To choose from a list of existing folders,  
choose Select folder from list, highlight  
a folder, and press J.  
9 Copy the images.  
Highlight Copy image(s)? and  
press 2.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; highlight Yes and  
press J. Press J again to exit  
when copying is complete.  
D Copying Images  
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination  
card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.  
If the destination folder contains an  
image with the same name as one of  
the images to be copied, a  
confirmationdialogwillbedisplayed.  
Select Replace existing image to  
replace the image with the image to  
be copied, or select Replace all to  
replace all existing images with the same names without further  
prompting. To continue without replacing the image, select Skip, or  
select Cancel to exit without copying any further images.  
U
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0 237) is  
not. Hidden images can not be copied.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Image Review  
Choose whether pictures are automatically  
displayed in the monitor immediately after  
shooting. If Off is selected, pictures can only  
be displayed by pressing the K button.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
After Delete  
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.  
Option  
Show  
next  
Description  
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame,  
previous picture will be displayed.  
S
Show  
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame,  
T
U
previous following picture will be displayed.  
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded,  
following picture will be displayed as described for Show  
next. If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse  
order, previous picture will be displayed as described for  
Continue  
as before  
Show previous.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Rotate Tall  
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for  
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is  
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are  
not rotated automatically during image review.  
Option  
Description  
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for  
display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for  
Auto image rotation (0 304) will be displayed in “wide”  
(landscape) orientation.  
On  
U
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”  
(landscape) orientation.  
Off  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ D playback menu  
Slide Show  
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder  
(0 245). Hidden images (0 245) are not displayed.  
Option  
Start  
Description  
Start slide show.  
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.  
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press J. The following  
operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:  
To  
Press  
Description  
Skip back/skip  
ahead  
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip  
to next frame.  
View additional  
photo info  
Pause/resume  
Exit to playback  
menu  
Change photo info displayed (0 207).  
Pause or resume slide show.  
J
G
End slide show and return to playback menu.  
Exit to playback  
mode  
End slide show and exit to full-frame (0 204)  
or thumbnail playback (0 216).  
K
Exit to shooting  
mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway to return  
to shooting mode.  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when  
the show ends. Select Restart to restart or  
Exit to return to the playback menu.  
U
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C The Shooting Menu:  
Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C  
(shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
Option  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
0
254  
256  
256  
258  
72  
File naming  
Primary slot selection  
Secondary slot function  
Image quality  
72  
68  
Image size  
71  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance  
Set Picture Control  
Manage Picture Control  
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Live view mode  
Multiple exposure  
Movie settings  
70  
70  
134  
154  
160  
166  
164  
258  
259  
96  
49, 52  
184  
62  
U
Interval timer shooting  
189  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Shooting Menu Bank  
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the  
exceptions of Interval timer shooting, Multiple exposure, and  
modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual  
adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the  
others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings,  
select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The  
new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is  
turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.  
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other  
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination  
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,  
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename  
option as described below.  
A Shooting Menu Bank  
The current menu bank is shown in the  
information display, which can be viewed by  
pressing the R button.  
❚❚Renaming Shooting Menu Banks  
Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the  
list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1.  
1 Select a bank.  
Highlight the desired bank and  
press 2.  
U
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard area  
2 Enter a name.  
To move the cursor in the name  
area, press the W button and  
press 4 or 2. To enter a new  
letter at the current cursor  
position, use the multi selector  
to highlight the desired  
Name area  
character in the keyboard area  
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the  
character at the current cursor position, press the O button. To  
return to the shooting menu without changing the bank  
name, press the G button.  
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any  
characters after the twentieth will be deleted.  
3 Save changes and exit.  
After editing the name, press J  
to save changes and exit. The  
Shooting menu bank menu  
will be displayed.  
U
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Reset Shooting Menu  
Select Yes to restore default settings for the  
current shooting menu bank. See page 368  
for a list of default settings.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
Active Folder  
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.  
❚❚New Folder Number  
1 Select New folder number.  
Highlight New folder number  
and press 2. The dialog shown  
at right will be displayed.  
2 Choose a folder number.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a  
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y  
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:  
• W : Folder is empty.  
• X : Folder is partially full.  
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered  
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.  
3 Save changes and exit.  
Press  
J
to complete the operation and return to the shooting  
menu (to exit without changing the active folder, press the  
G
U
button). If a folder with the specified number does not already  
exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent photographs will  
be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Select Folder  
1 Choose Select folder.  
Highlight Select folder and  
press 2.  
2 Highlight a folder.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.  
3 Select the highlighted folder.  
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the  
shooting menu (to exit without changing the active folder,  
press the G button). Subsequent photographs will be  
stored in the selected folder.  
D Folder and File Numbers  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a  
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no  
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder  
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number  
less than 999 and less than 999 images.  
A Number of Folders  
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card  
contains a very large number of folders.  
U
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
File Naming  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in  
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”,  
followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension  
(e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to select  
three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name.  
For information on editing file names, see steps 2 and 3 of  
“
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks” (0 254). Note that the portion  
of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters  
long.  
A Extensions  
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”  
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.AVI” for movies, and  
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded  
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images  
have the same file names but different extensions.  
Long Exp. NR  
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
If On is selected, photographs taken at  
shutter speeds slower than 8 s will be  
processed to reduce noise. The time required  
for processing is roughly equal to the current  
shutter speed; during processing, “l m”  
will blink in the shutter speed/aperture  
displays and pictures can not be taken (if the  
camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will  
be saved but noise reduction will not be performed). In  
continuous release mode, frame rates will slow and while  
photographs are being processed, the capacity of the memory  
buffer will drop.  
U
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ C shooting menu  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to  
reduce “noise.”  
Option  
Description  
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO  
800 and higher. While photographs are being processed,  
the capacity of the memory buffer will drop. Choose the  
amount of noise reduction performed from High,  
Normal, and Low.  
S High  
T Normal  
U Low  
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3  
and higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than  
the amount performed when Low is selected for High  
ISO NR.  
Off  
U
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACustom Settings:  
Fine-TuningCameraSettings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A  
(Custom Settings menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit  
individual preferences.  
Custom Setting groups  
Main menu  
B: Customsetting A: Resetcustom  
U
bank (0 262)  
settings  
(0 262)  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
Custom setting bank  
Reset custom settings  
Autofocus  
Custom Setting  
Shooting/display  
0
0
B
A
a
262  
262  
d
d5 CL mode shooting speed  
d6 Max. continuous release  
d7 File number sequence  
d8 Information display  
d9 LCD illumination  
d10 Exposure delay mode  
d11 MB-D10 battery type  
d12 Battery order  
276  
276  
277  
278  
278  
278  
279  
280  
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 AF-S priority selection  
a3 Dynamic AF area  
a4 Focus tracking with lock-on 266  
a5 AF activation  
a6 AF point illumination  
a7 Focus point wrap-around  
a8 AF point selection  
a9 Built-in AF-assist illuminator 268  
a10 AF-ON for MB-D10  
Metering/exposure  
263  
264  
264  
266  
266  
267  
267  
e
Bracketing/flash  
e1 Flash sync speed  
281  
282  
283  
289  
289  
290  
290  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto bracketing set  
e6 Auto bracketing (Mode M)  
e7 Bracketing order  
269  
b
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
b3 Exp comp/fine tune  
270  
270  
270  
b4 Easy exposure compensation 271  
b5 Center-weighted area 272  
b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 272  
Timers/AE lock  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L 273  
f
Controls  
f1 D switch  
f2 Multi selector center button 291  
f3 Multi selector  
f4 Photo info/playback  
f5 Assign Fn button  
f6 Assign preview button  
f7 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f8 Customize command dials  
f9 Release button to use dial  
f10 No memory card?  
291  
c
292  
292  
292  
296  
296  
297  
298  
299  
299  
c2 Auto meter-off delay  
c3 Self-timer  
c4 Monitor off delay  
273  
273  
274  
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
275  
275  
275  
276  
d2 Viewfinder grid display  
d3 Viewfinder warning display  
d4 Screen tips  
f11 Reverse indicators  
U
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
B: Custom Setting Bank  
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to  
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a  
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of  
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new  
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned  
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.  
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other  
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination  
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,  
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename  
option as described on page 255.  
A Custom Settings Bank  
The bank letter is shown in the information  
display, which can be viewed by pressing the R  
button. If settings in the current bank have  
been modified from default values, an asterisk  
will be displayed adjacent to the altered  
settings in the second level of the Custom  
Settings menu.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
A: Reset Custom Settings  
Select Yes to restore default settings for the  
current Custom Settings bank. See page 369  
for a list of default settings. Custom settings  
are not reset when a two-button reset is  
performed.  
U
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a: Autofocus  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
This option controls whether  
Focus mode selector  
photographs can be taken  
whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed (release priority)  
or only when the camera is in focus  
(focus priority) in continuous-servo  
AF. To select continuous-servo AF,  
rotate the focus mode selector to C.  
Option  
Description  
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
G
Release  
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in  
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for  
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator  
(I) is displayed.  
Release +  
focus  
E
F
Focus  
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when the in-  
focus indicator (I) is displayed. The camera will continue to adjust  
focus until the shutter is released.  
U
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection  
This option controls whether  
photographs can be taken only  
when the camera is in focus (focus  
priority) or whenever the shutter-  
release button is pressed (release  
priority) in single-servo AF. To select  
single-servo AF, rotate the focus  
mode selector to S.  
Focus mode selector  
Option  
Description  
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator  
(I) is displayed.  
G
Release  
Focus  
F
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is  
displayed focus will lock while the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a3: Dynamic AF Area  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic-area  
AF (I; 0 76) is selected in continuous-servo AF (focus mode C;  
0 74), the camera will focus based on information from  
surrounding focus points. Choose the number of focus points from  
9, 21, and 51 based on subject movement (note that only active  
focus point is displayed in the viewfinder; the remaining focus  
points provide information to assist focus operation).  
Option  
Description  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will focus based on information from the  
surrounding eight focus points. Choose when there is  
time to compose the photograph or when  
photographing subjects that are moving predictably  
(e.g., runners or race cars on a track).  
c
9 points  
U
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Description  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will focus based on information from the  
surrounding 20 focus points. Choose when  
photographing subjects that are moving  
d 21 points  
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will focus based on information from the  
surrounding 50 focus points. Choose when  
photographing subjects that are moving quickly and  
can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will use 3D-tracking to track the subject and  
select a new focus point as required. Use to quickly  
compose pictures with subjects that are moving  
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the  
subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from  
the shutter-release button and recompose the  
photograph with the subject in the selected focus  
point.  
e 51 points  
f 51 points  
(3D-tracking)  
A 3D-tracking  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the  
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.  
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with  
subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a  
very small area of the frame.  
U
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large  
changes in the distance to the subject.  
Option  
Description  
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the  
camera waits for the specified period (long, normal, or  
short) before adjusting the distance to the subject. This  
prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is  
briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame.  
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to  
the subject changes. Use when photographing a series of  
subjects at varying distances in quick succession.  
C
Long  
D
E
Normal  
Short  
Off  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a5: AF Activation  
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the  
shutter-release button and the B button  
can be used to initiate autofocus. If AF-ON  
only is selected, autofocus is only initiated  
when the B button is pressed.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a6: AF Point Illumination  
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the  
viewfinder.  
Option  
Auto  
Description  
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as  
needed to establish contrast with the background.  
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of  
the brightness of the background. Depending on the  
brightness of the background, the selected focus point may  
be difficult to see.  
On  
U
Off  
The selected focus point is not highlighted.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around  
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one  
edge of the viewfinder to another.  
Option  
Wrap  
Description  
Focus-point selection “wraps  
around” from top to bottom,  
bottom to top, right to left, and left  
to right, so that, for example,  
w
q
pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the  
viewfinder display is highlighted (q) selects the  
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display (w).  
The focus-area display is bounded by the outermost focus  
No wrap points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at  
the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a8: AF Point Selection  
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-  
point selection.  
Option  
Description  
Choose from the 51 focus points  
shown at right.  
B 51 points  
Choose from the 11 focus points  
A 11 points shown at right. Use for quick focus-  
point selection.  
U
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a9: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist  
illuminator lights to assist the focus  
operation when lighting is poor.  
Option  
On  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor. AF-  
assist illumination is only available when both of the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Single-servo autofocus is selected for focus mode (0 74).  
2. Auto-area AF is chosen for AF-area mode (0 76), or single-  
point or dynamic-area AF is chosen and the center focus  
point is selected.  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus  
operation. The camera may not be able to focus using  
autofocus when lighting is poor.  
Off  
A The AF-Assist Illuminator  
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft.  
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–  
200 mm and remove the lens hood.  
A See Also  
See page 345 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF  
assist.  
U
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
a10: AF-On for MB-D10  
Choose the function assigned to  
the B button on the optional  
MB-D10 battery pack.  
Option  
Description  
A
B
AF-ON  
Pressing the MB-D10 B button initiates autofocus.  
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D10 B  
button is pressed.  
AE/AF lock  
Exposure locks while the MB-D10 B button is  
pressed.  
C
AE lock only  
Exposure locks when the MB-D10 B button is  
AE lock (Reset pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
D
on release)  
pressed a second time, the shutter is released or the  
exposure meters turn off.  
Exposure locks when the MB-D10 B button is  
E AE lock (Hold) pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off.  
F
AF lock only Focus locks while the MB-D10 B button is pressed.  
Same as Fn  
button  
The MB-D10 B button performs the function  
selected for Custom Setting f5 (0 292).  
G
D VR Lenses  
Vibration reduction can not be initiated by pressing the B button.  
U
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b: Metering/Exposure  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
Select the increments used when making  
adjustments to ISO sensitivity.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.  
Select the increments used when making  
adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and  
bracketing.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b3: Exp Comp/Fine Tune  
Select the increments used when making  
adjustments to exposure and flash  
compensation.  
U
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation  
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set  
exposure compensation (0 118). If On (Auto reset) or On is  
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even  
when exposure compensation is set to 0.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the  
command dials (see note below). The setting  
selected using the command dial is reset when the  
camera or exposure meters turn off (exposure  
compensation settings selected using the E button  
are not reset).  
K On (Auto reset)  
As above, except that the exposure compensation  
value selected using the command dial is not reset  
when the camera or exposure meters turn off.  
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E  
button and rotating the main command dial.  
On  
Off  
A Change Main/Sub  
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or  
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)  
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f8 (Customize  
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 297).  
Customize command dials > Change main/sub  
Off  
On  
e
f
g
h
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
N/A  
U
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b5: Center-Weighted Area  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted  
metering assigns the greatest weight to a circle in  
the center of the frame. The diameter (φ) of this  
circle can be set to 6, 8, 10, or 13 mm or to the  
average of the entire frame.  
Option  
M φ 6 mm  
L φ 8 mm  
N φ 10 mm  
O φ 13 mm  
P Average  
Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non-CPU lens is  
used.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure  
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure  
value selected by the camera. Exposure can  
be fine tuned separately for each metering  
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.  
D Fine-Tuning Exposure  
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank  
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure  
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how  
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-  
tuning menu. Exposure compensation (0 118) is preferred in most  
situations.  
U
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c: Timers/AE Lock  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
At the default setting of Off, exposure only  
locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. If  
On is selected, exposure will also lock when  
the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay  
Choose how long the camera continues to  
meter exposure when no operations are  
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture  
displays in the control panel and viewfinder  
turn off automatically when the exposure  
meters turn off.  
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c3: Self-Timer  
Choose the length of the shutter release  
delay in self-timer mode.  
U
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
c4: Monitor off Delay  
Choose how long the monitor remains on  
when no operations are performed during  
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and  
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s)  
or when menus (Menus; defaults to 20 s) or  
information (Information display; defaults  
to 10 s) are displayed. Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for  
longer battery life. Except when image review is on, the monitor  
will remain on for about ten minutes if no operations are  
performed when the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or  
EH-5 AC adapter.  
U
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d: Shooting/Display  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d1: Beep  
If High (high pitch) or Low (low pitch) is selected, a beep will sound  
at the selected pitch while the self-timer is active or when the  
camera focuses using single-servo AF. Note that a beep will not  
sound when the camera focuses during movie recording or in  
quiet-shutter release mode (mode J) or if Release is selected for  
Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection, 0 264).  
c appears in the control panel and  
information display when the beep is on.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display  
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines  
in the viewfinder for reference when  
composing photographs.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d3: Viewfinder Warning Display  
Choose On to display a low battery icon (d)  
in the viewfinder when the battery is low.  
U
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d4: Screen Tips  
Choose On to display tool tips for items  
selected in the information display.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d5: CL Mode Shooting Speed  
Choose the maximum frame advance rate in  
CL (continuous low speed) mode (during  
interval timer photography, this setting also  
determines the frame advance rate for single-  
frame). Note that the frame advance rate  
may drop below the selected value at slow  
shutter speeds.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d6: Max. Continuous Release  
The maximum number of shots that can be  
taken in a single burst in continuous mode  
can be set to any value between 1 and 100.  
A The Memory Buffer  
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d6, shooting will  
slow when the memory buffer fills. See page 394 for more information  
on the capacity of the memory buffer.  
U
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d7: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera  
names the file by adding one to the last file  
number used. This option controls whether  
file numbering continues from the last  
number used when a new folder is created,  
the memory card is formatted, or a new  
memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or  
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering  
continues from the last number used or from the largest file  
number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a  
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a  
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created  
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,  
the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is  
On  
Off inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created  
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current  
folder contains 999 photographs.  
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is  
assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file  
number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file  
Reset  
J
numbering is reset to 0001.  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999  
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release  
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.  
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number sequence) and then  
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.  
U
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d8: Information Display  
At the default setting of Auto (AUTO), the color of the lettering in the  
information display (0 12) will automatically change from black to  
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.  
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose  
Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white  
lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for  
maximum contrast with the selected text color.  
Dark on light  
Light on dark  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d9: LCD Illumination  
At the default setting of Off, the control panel  
backlight (LCD illuminator) will only light while  
the power switch is rotated toward D. If On is  
selected, the control panel will be illuminated  
while the exposure meters are active (  
0
39).  
Select Off for increased battery life.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d10: Exposure Delay Mode  
At the default setting of Off, shutter is released  
when the shutter-release button is pressed.  
When shooting with Tripod selected in live  
view mode (  
0
49) or in situations where the  
slightest camera movement can blur pictures,  
On can be selected to delay shutter release  
until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and the  
mirror is raised.  
U
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d11: MB-D10 Battery Type  
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when eight AA  
batteries are used in the optional MB-D10 battery pack, match the  
option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the  
battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when using  
EN-EL3e or optional EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 batteries.  
Option  
Description  
1
2
3
4
LR6 (AA alkaline)  
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)  
FR6 (AA lithium)  
ZR6 (AA Ni-Mn)  
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.  
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.  
Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.  
Select when using ZR6 Ni-Mn AA batteries.  
A Using AA Batteries  
EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries (available separately) or  
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries are recommended for best  
performance. Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries (0 396).  
The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 °C  
(68 °F) and varies with make and storage conditions; in some cases,  
batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some AA  
batteries can not be used; due to their performance characteristics and  
limited capacity, alkaline and nickel-manganese batteries should only  
be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer  
temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:  
Control panel Viewfinder  
Description  
L
—
d
Batteries fully charged.  
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.  
I
H
(blinks)  
d
(blinks)  
Shutter release disabled. Change batteries.  
Battery level for EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion  
batteries is displayed normally.  
U
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
d12: Battery Order  
Choose whether the battery in the camera or  
the batteries in the battery pack are used first  
when an optional MB-D10 battery pack is  
attached.  
A X icon is displayed in the camera control  
panel when the batteries in the MB-D10  
are in use.  
A The MB-D10 Battery Pack  
The MB-D10 takes one EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion  
battery or eight AA alkaline, Ni-MH, lithium, or nickel manganese  
batteries (an EN-EL3e is supplied with the camera; EN-EL4a, EN-EL4, and  
AA batteries are available separately). Higher frame rates are available  
with EN-EL4a, EN-EL4, and AA batteries (0 89); note, however, that in  
the case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as battery level  
drops.  
The information display shows the type of  
battery inserted in the MB-D10 as follows:  
MB-D10 battery type display  
u
Battery type  
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery  
EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
AA batteries  
v
w
U
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e: Bracketing/Flash  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e1: Flash Sync Speed  
This option controls flash sync speed.  
Option  
Description  
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,  
and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter  
speed is set to 1/320 s. When the camera shows a shutter  
1/320 s  
(Auto FP) speed of 1/320 s in exposure mode  
or g, auto FP high-  
e
speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is  
faster than 1/320 s.  
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,  
and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter  
speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter  
1/250 s  
(Auto FP) speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode  
or g, auto FP high-  
e
speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is  
faster than 1/250 s.  
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.  
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or  
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest  
possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be  
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.  
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by  
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for  
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright  
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP”  
when auto FP high-speed sync is active.  
U
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Control at 1/320 s (Auto FP)  
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash  
sync speed, 0 281), the built-in flash can be used at shutter  
speeds as fast as 1/320 s, while optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and  
SB-R200 flash units can be used at any shutter speed (Auto FP High-  
Speed Sync).  
Flash sync speed  
1/320 s (Auto FP)  
1/250 s (Auto FP)  
1/250 s  
Built-in  
flash  
—
Optional  
flash unit  
Built-in  
flash  
—
Optional  
Built-in  
flash  
—
—
Optional  
flash unit  
—
Shutter speed  
1/8,000–1/320 s  
1/320–1/250 s  
1/250–30 s  
flash unit  
Auto FP  
Auto FP  
Auto FP  
Flash sync *  
—
—
Flash sync  
* Flash range drops as shutter speed increases. Flash range will nevertheless  
be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP.  
D The Flash-Ready Indicator  
When the flash fires at full power, the flash-indicator in the camera  
viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be  
underexposed. Note that the flash-ready indicators on optional flash  
units will not display this warning when 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed  
This option determines the slowest shutter  
speed available when using front- or rear-  
curtain sync or red-eye reduction in  
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto  
exposure modes (regardless of the setting  
chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s  
in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash  
settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction  
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).  
U
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.  
Option Description  
1 TTL  
Manual  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to  
shooting conditions.  
2
Choose the flash level (0 284).  
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open,  
producing a strobe-light effect (0 284).  
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling  
one or more remote optional flash units (0 285).  
3 Repeating flash  
Commander  
4
mode  
A Flash Control Mode  
The flash control mode for the built-in flash is  
shown in the information display.  
A “Manual” and “Repeating Flash”  
Y icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options  
are selected.  
A The SB-400  
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached  
and turned on, Custom Setting e3 changes to  
Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode  
for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and  
Manual (Repeating flash and Commander  
mode options are not available).  
U
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Manual  
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power). At  
full power, the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 17/56 (m/ft.,  
ISO 200, 20°C/68°F).  
❚❚Repeating Flash  
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter  
is open, producing a strobe-light effect.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the following  
options, 1 or 3 to change.  
Option  
Output  
Description  
Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).  
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected  
output. Note that depending on shutter speed and the  
option selected for Frequency, the actual number of  
flashes may be less than selected.  
Times  
Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.  
A “Times“  
The options available for Times are determined by flash output.  
Output  
1/4  
1/8  
Options available for Times  
2
2–5  
1/16  
1/32  
1/64  
1/128  
2–10  
2–10, 15  
2–10, 15, 20, 25  
2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35  
U
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Commander Mode  
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more  
remote optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in  
up to two groups (A and B) using advanced wireless lighting.  
Selecting this option displays the menu  
shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the  
following options, 1 or 3 to change.  
Option  
Built-in  
flash  
Description  
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).  
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between  
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.  
TTL  
M
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128  
(1/128 of full power).  
The built-in flash does not fire, but the AF-assist illuminator  
– – lights. The built-in flash must be raised so that it can emit  
monitor pre-flashes.  
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.  
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between  
TTL  
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.  
Auto aperture (available only with SB-900 and SB-800 flash  
AA units). Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0  
and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.  
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128  
M
(1/128 of full power).  
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.  
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options  
available are the same as those listed for Group A, above.  
Group B  
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must  
be set to the same channel.  
Channel  
U
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.  
1 Adjust settings for the built-in  
flash.  
Choose the flash control mode and  
output level for the built-in flash. Note  
that output level can not be adjusted in  
– – mode.  
2 Adjust settings for group A.  
Choose the flash control mode and  
output level for the flash units in group  
A.  
3 Adjust settings for group B.  
Choose the flash control mode and  
output level for the flash units in group  
B.  
4 Select the channel.  
5 Press J.  
U
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Compose the shot.  
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below.  
Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash  
units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.  
Wireless remote  
60 ° or less  
30 ° or less  
5 m/15 ft. or  
less  
sensors on flash  
units should face  
camera.  
10 m/33 ft.  
or less  
Camera  
(built-in flash)  
30 ° or less  
60 ° or less  
5 m/15 ft. or  
less  
7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel.  
Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel  
selected in Step 4. See the flash unit instruction manuals for  
details.  
8 Raise the built-in flash.  
Press the flash pop-up button to raise the built-in flash. Note  
that even if – – is selected for Built-in flash>Mode, the built-  
in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be  
emitted.  
9 Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the  
flash-ready lights for all other flash units are lit, frame the  
photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock (0 178) can be used if  
desired.  
U
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Flash Sync Mode Display  
M does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when – –  
is selected for Built-in flash > Mode.  
A Flash Compensation  
The flash compensation value selected with the Y (M) button and sub-  
command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for  
the built-in flash, group A, and group B in the Commander mode  
menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when  
a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built-in  
flash > TTL. The Y icon flashes when the built-in flash is in mode M.  
D Commander Mode  
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the  
monitor preflashes from the built-in flash (particular care is required  
when not using a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections  
from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode)  
or the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may  
interfere with exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built-  
in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose  
low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (large f-numbers) or use an  
optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is  
required for best results with rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter  
timing flashes. After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot  
and view the results in the camera monitor.  
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may  
be used, the practical maximum is three. With more than this number,  
the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with  
performance.  
U
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e4: Modeling Flash  
If On is selected when the camera is being  
used with the built-in flash or an optional  
SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit,  
a modeling flash will be emitted when the  
camera depth-of-field preview button is  
pressed (0 105). No modeling flash is  
emitted if Off is selected.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e5: Auto Bracketing Set  
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing  
(0 120) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both  
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only  
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB  
bracketing (m) to perform white-balance bracketing (0 125), or  
ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting  
(0 129). Note that white balance bracketing is not available at  
image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.  
U
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)  
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &  
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual  
exposure mode.  
Option  
Description  
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5  
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level  
(Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom  
Setting e5 set to AE only) or shutter speed,  
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to  
AE & flash).  
Flash/speed  
F
G
Flash/speed/  
aperture  
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to  
Flash/aperture AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom  
H
I
Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e5  
set to AE & flash).  
Flash only  
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If  
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,  
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless  
of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control (0 98).  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
e7: Bracketing Order  
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure, flash,  
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order  
described on pages 122 and 126. If Under>MTR>over (I) is  
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the  
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.  
U
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f: Controls  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f1: DSwitch  
Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to D.  
Option Description  
LCD backlight (D) Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.  
D
D and information Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting  
0
display  
information is displayed in monitor.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f2: Multi Selector Center Button  
This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi  
selector in shooting and playback modes (regardless of the option  
selected, pressing the center of the multi selector when a movie is  
displayed full frame starts movie playback).  
❚❚Shooting Mode  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Select center focus point  
Select center focus point.  
J
K
Highlight active focus point Highlight active focus point.  
Not used  
None.  
❚❚Playback Mode  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.  
n
o
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a  
View histograms histogram is displayed while the center of the multi  
selector is pressed.  
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback  
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting  
from Low magnification, Medium magnification,  
and High magnification. The zoom display will  
center on the active focus point.  
Zoom on/off  
p
U
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Display card slot selection dialog; highlight slot and  
press 2 to display list of folders. Highlight folder  
and press J to select folder for playback. Only  
folders currently selected for playback (0 245) are  
displayed.  
Choose slot and  
folder  
u
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f3: Multi Selector  
If Reset meter-off delay is selected,  
operating the multi selector when the  
exposure meters are off (0 39) will activate  
the exposure meters. If Do nothing is  
selected, the exposure meters will not be  
activated when the multi selector is pressed.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f4: Photo Info/Playback  
If Info13/Playback42is selected, pressing  
1 or 3 in full-frame playback changes the  
photo information displayed, while pressing  
4 or 2 displays additional images. To reverse  
the role of the multi selector buttons so that  
pressing 1 or 3 displays additional images  
and pressing 4 or 2 changes the photo information displayed,  
select Info42/Playback13. This setting also applies to the multi  
selector on the optional MB-D10 battery pack.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f5: Assign Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn button,  
either by itself (Fn button press) or when  
used in combination with the command dials  
(Fn button + dials).  
U
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Fn Button Press  
Selecting Fn button press for Custom Setting f5 displays the  
following options:  
Option  
Description  
Preview *  
Press the Fn button to preview depth of field (0 105).  
q
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash  
and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200  
flash units only, 0 178). Press again to cancel FV lock.  
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
FV lock *  
r
AE/AF lock  
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and  
remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters  
turn off.  
AE lock  
(Reset on  
release) *  
D
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and  
remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
time or the exposure meters turn off.  
AE lock  
(Hold) *  
E
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
F
s
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn  
Flash off  
button is pressed.  
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or  
ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet  
shutter-release mode, all shots in the current  
bracketing program will be taken each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. If white balance  
bracketing is active or continuous release mode  
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the  
Bracketing  
burst  
t
bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is  
held down (in single frame release mode, white  
balance bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate  
for CH release mode).  
Matrix  
metering  
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
L
U
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Description  
Center-  
weighted  
metering  
Spot  
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn  
button is pressed.  
M
N
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
metering  
Fn button performs same function as K button.  
Select when using a telephoto lens or in other  
circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the K  
button with your left hand.  
Playback *  
K
Access top  
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY  
item in MY MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a  
f
MENU *  
frequently-used menu item.  
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or  
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the control  
panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with  
the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed  
(to record NEF/RAW copies with a series of  
photographs, keep the shutter-release button  
pressed halfway between shots). To exit without  
recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button  
again.  
+NEF  
(RAW) *  
e
No operation is performed when the Fn button is  
pressed.  
None  
* This option can not be used in combination with Fn button + dials (0 295).  
Selecting this option displays a message and sets Fn button + dials to None.  
If another option is selected for Fn button + dials while this setting is active,  
Fn button press will be set to None.  
U
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Fn button + dials  
Selecting Fn button + dials for Custom Setting f5 displays the  
following options:  
Option  
Description  
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are  
rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure modes f  
1 step spd/ and h) and aperture (exposure modes g and h) are  
v
aperture  
made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option  
selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure  
cntrl., 0 270).  
Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to  
CPU lens  
number  
choose a lens number specified using the Non-CPU  
lens data option.  
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial  
to choose the number of shots in the bracketing  
w
t
Auto  
bracketing program. Press the Fn button and rotate the sub-  
command dial to select bracketing increment.  
If continuous-servo AF (focus mode C; 0 74) is selected  
when dynamic-area AF (I) is chosen for AF-area mode  
(0 76), the number of focus points can be selected by  
pressing the Fn button and rotating either of the  
Dynamic AF  
area  
I
command dials (0 264).  
No operation is performed when the command dials  
are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.  
None  
U
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f6: Assign Preview Button  
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field  
preview button, either by itself (Preview  
button press) or when used in combination  
with the command dials (Preview +  
command dials). The options available are  
the same as for Fn button press (0 293) and  
Fn button + dials (0 295), except that the  
default option for Preview button press is Preview and the  
default setting for Preview + command dials is None.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f7: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L  
button, either by itself (AE-L/AF-L button  
press) or when used in combination with the  
command dials (AE-L/AF-L + command  
dials). The options available for AE-L/AF-L  
button press are the same as for Fn button  
press (0 293), except that AE-L/AF-L button press defaults to AE/  
AF lock and has an additional AF-ON option (if this option is  
selected, pressing the AE-L/AF-L button has the same effect as  
pressing the B button to initiate autofocus; this option can not  
be used in combination with AE-L/AF-L + command dials). The  
options available for AE-L/AF-L + command dials are the same as  
for Fn button + dials (0 295), except that AE-L/AF-L + command  
dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd/aperture option.  
U
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f8: Customize Command Dials  
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command  
dials.  
Option  
Description  
Controls the direction of the command  
dials. Choose No for normal command  
Reverse dial operation, Yes to reverse the  
rotation rotation of the command dials. This  
setting also applies to the command  
dials for the MB-D10.  
If Off is selected, the main command  
dial controls shutter speed and the  
sub-command dial controls aperture.  
Change If On is selected, the main command  
main/sub dial will control aperture and the sub-  
command dial shutter speed. This  
setting also applies to the command  
dials for the MB-D10.  
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be  
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main  
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub). If  
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with  
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will  
show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses  
is still set using the sub-command dial). Live view is not  
Aperture  
setting  
available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with  
an aperture ring is attached. Note that regardless of the  
setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust  
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.  
U
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Description  
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the  
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight  
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On is selected, the main  
command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed  
during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or right during  
Menus thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or  
and down. The sub-command dial is used to display additional  
playback photo information in full-frame playback and to move the  
cursor up or down during thumbnail playback. While menus  
are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays  
the sub-menu for the selected option, while rotating it left  
displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2, the  
center of the multi selector, or J.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f9: Release Button to Use Dial  
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by  
holding the I, E, M, ISO, QUAL, or WB button and rotating a  
command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the  
button is released (this also applies to the button to which  
bracketing is currently assigned; 0 295). Setting ends when any of  
the affected buttons is pressed again or the shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway. Except when No limit is selected for Custom  
Setting c2 Auto meter-off delay, setting will also end when the  
exposure meters turn off.  
U
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f10: No Memory Card?  
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when  
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded  
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If  
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only  
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that  
when photographs are being captured to a computer using  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), photographs are not  
recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be  
enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option.  
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu  
f11: Reverse Indicators  
At the default setting of  
(V), the exposure  
indicators in the control panel, viewfinder and information display  
are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values  
on the right. Select  
(W) to display negative  
values on the left and positive values on the right.  
U
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BThe Setup Menu: CameraSetup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Option  
Format memory card  
LCD brightness  
Clean image sensor  
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1  
Video mode  
HDMI  
Time zone and date  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Option  
0
0
301 Battery info  
307  
227  
308  
309  
310  
201  
311  
196  
312  
313  
314  
301 Wireless transmitter  
358 Image authentication  
361 Copyright information  
301 Save/load settings  
302 GPS  
302 Virtual horizon  
303 Non-CPU lens data  
303 AF fine tune  
304 Eye-Fi upload 2  
305 Firmware version  
1
2
Not available when battery is low.  
Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0 313).  
U
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Format Memory Card  
To begin formatting, choose a memory card  
slot and select Yes. Note that formatting  
permanently deletes all pictures and other data  
on the card in the selected slot. Before  
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as  
required.  
D During Formatting  
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.  
A Two-Button Format  
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and I)  
buttons for more than two seconds (0 34).  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
LCD Brightness  
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness.  
Choose higher values for increased  
brightness, lower values for reduced  
brightness.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Video Mode  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video  
connector, be sure the camera video mode matches the device  
video standard (NTSC or PAL).  
U
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
HDMI  
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface) connector, allowing pictures to be played  
back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a cable with  
a type C mini-pin connector (available separately from commercial  
suppliers). Before connecting the camera to high-definition  
device, choose the HDMI format from the options below.  
Option  
v Auto  
Description  
The camera automatically selects the appropriate  
format.  
J 480p (progressive) 640 × 480 (progressive) format  
K 576p (progressive) 720 × 576 (progressive) format  
L 720p (progressive) 1,280 × 720 (progressive) format  
M 1080i (interlaced) 1,920 × 1,080 (interlaced) format  
The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device  
is connected.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Time Zone and Date  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display  
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set  
to the time in the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Set the camera clock (0 29). If the clock is not set, a  
blinking B icon will appear in the control panel.  
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are  
displayed.  
Date and time  
Date format  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will  
automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The  
default setting is Off.  
Daylight  
saving time  
U
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Language  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The  
following options are available.  
Danish  
German  
English  
Spanish  
Finnish  
French  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Swedish  
Traditional Chinese  
Simplified Chinese  
Japanese  
Italian  
Dutch  
Korean  
Norwegian  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Image Comment  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.  
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 355). The comment is also  
visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0 213).  
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 255.  
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.  
• Attach comment: Select this option to  
attach the comment to all subsequent  
photographs. Attach comment can be  
turned on and off by highlighting it and  
pressing 2.  
U
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on  
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically  
during playback (0 204) or when viewed in ViewNX (supplied) or  
in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 355). The following  
orientations are recorded:  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counter-clockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose  
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens  
pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for  
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the  
playback menu (0 251). Note that because the camera itself is already  
in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated  
automatically during image review (0 206).  
U
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the  
Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is  
mounted on the camera. A lens with a focal length of at least  
50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the  
way in.  
1 Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J. To exit  
without acquiring image dust  
off data, press G.  
• Start: The message shown at  
right will be displayed and “rEF” will  
appear in the viewfinder and control  
panel displays.  
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this  
option to clean the image sensor  
before starting. The message shown at  
right will be displayed and “rEF” will  
appear in the viewfinder and control  
panel displays when cleaning is  
complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image  
sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start  
only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing  
photographs.  
U
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-  
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;  
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
3 Acquire dust off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off  
when the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the reference object is too bright or too  
dark, the camera may be unable to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data  
and the message shown at right will be  
displayed. Choose another reference  
object and repeat the process from  
step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for  
photographs taken with different lenses or at  
different apertures. Reference images can not  
be viewed using computer imaging software. A  
grid pattern is displayed when reference images  
are viewed on the camera.  
U
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Battery Info  
View information on the battery currently  
inserted in the camera.  
Item  
Description  
Bat. meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage.  
The number of times the shutter has been released with the  
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that  
Pic. meter the camera may sometimes release the shutter without  
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset  
white balance.  
This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by an  
optional MB-D10 battery pack equipped with an EN-EL4a or  
EN-EL4 battery (available separately).  
Calibration • j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is  
required to ensure that battery level can be measured  
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging.  
• —: Calibration not required.  
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that  
battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has  
reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced.  
Battery Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C  
age  
(41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life; the  
battery age display will however return to normal once the  
battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C  
(68 °F) or higher.  
A The MB-D10 Battery Pack  
The display for the MB-D10 battery pack is  
shown at right. The picture meter and battery  
age are not displayed when the battery pack  
contains AA batteries.  
U
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Wireless Transmitter  
This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless  
network, using an optional WT-4 wireless transmitter. See  
“Connections: Wireless and Ethernet Networks” (0 227).  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Image Authentication  
Choose s On to embed image authentication information in  
new photographs as they are taken, allowing alterations to be  
detected using Nikon’s optional Image Authentication software.  
Image authentication information can not be embedded in  
existing photographs. Photographs taken with image  
authentication on are marked with a p icon on the file information  
and overview pages of the photo information display (0 208, 215).  
D Camera Control Pro 2  
Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF (RGB)  
photographs recorded directly to a computer using  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).  
A Copies  
Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created  
using the options in the retouch menu (0 315).  
U
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Copyright Information  
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.  
Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page  
in the photo information display (0 214) and can be viewed as  
metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available  
separately; 0 355).  
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 255.  
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.  
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described  
on page 255. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters  
long.  
• Attach copyright information: Select this  
option to attach copyright information to all  
subsequent photographs. Attach  
copyright information can be turned on  
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.  
D Copyright Information  
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,  
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that  
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring  
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any  
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright  
information option.  
U
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Save/Load Settings  
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory  
card, or to the memory card in the primary card slot if two memory  
cards are inserted (if the memory card is full, an error will be  
displayed; 0 381).  
Menu  
Option  
Display mode  
Image review  
After delete  
Playback  
Rotate tall  
Shooting menu bank  
File naming  
Image quality  
Image size  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance (with fine tuning and presets d-0–d-4)  
Set Picture Control  
Color space  
Shooting  
(all banks)  
Active D-Lighting  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Live view mode  
Movie settings  
Custom settings  
(all banks)  
All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings  
U
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu  
Option  
Clean image sensor  
Video mode  
HDMI  
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)  
Language  
Setup  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Image authentication  
Copyright information  
GPS  
Non-CPU lens data  
All My Menu items  
All recent settings  
Choose tab  
My Menu/  
Recent Settings  
Settings saved using the D300S can be restored by selecting Load  
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a  
memory card is inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings  
option is only available if the card contains saved settings.  
A Saved Settings  
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP5. The camera will not be  
able to load settings if the file name is changed.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Virtual Horizon  
Display a virtual horizon based on  
information from the camera image sensor.  
The reference line is displayed in green when  
the camera is level.  
D Tilting the Camera  
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when  
the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or  
back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the  
virtual horizon will not be displayed.  
Reference line  
U
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
AF Fine Tune  
Fine-tune focus for up to 12 lens types. AF tuning is not  
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal  
focus; use only when required.  
Option  
AF fine  
tune  
Description  
• On: Turn AF tuning on.  
• Off: Turn AF tuning off.  
(On/Off)  
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU  
lenses only). Press or to choose  
Saved a value between +20 and –20.  
value Values for up to 12 lens types can be  
stored. Only one value can be  
Move focal  
point away  
from camera.  
1
3
Current  
value  
stored for each type of lens.  
Choose the AF tuning value used  
when no previously saved value  
exists for the current lens (CPU  
Default  
Move focal  
Previous  
point toward value  
camera.  
lenses only).  
List previously saved AF tuning values. If a value exists for the  
current lens, it will be shown with a icon. To delete a lens from  
V
the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens  
identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as  
the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from  
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value  
can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the  
List  
saved  
values  
desired lens and press  
2.  
The menu shown at right will be  
displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an  
identifier and press J to save changes  
and exit.  
U
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D AF Tuning  
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity  
when AF tuning is applied.  
D Live View (Tripod) Mode  
Tuning is not applied to contrast-detect autofocus when Tripod is  
selected in live view mode (0 49).  
A Saved Value  
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is  
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and  
teleconverter.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Eye-Fi Upload  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card  
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the  
camera. Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected  
destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal  
strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose  
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.  
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is  
indicated by an icon in the information  
display:  
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures  
available for upload.  
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.  
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
• g: Error. — camera can not control Eye-Fi card. If a blinking Q  
appears in the control panel or viewfinder, refer to page 382; if  
this indicator is not displayed, pictures can be taken normally but  
you may be unable to change Eye-Fi settings.  
U
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
For information on errors involving Eye-Fi cards, see the manual  
provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries to the  
manufacturer. The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off,  
but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.  
A Supported Eye-Fi Cards  
As of April 2009, the following 2 GB Eye-Fi cards can be used: Eye-Fi  
Home, Eye-Fi Share, and Eye-Fi Explore. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in  
the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been  
updated to the latest version.  
G button ➜ B Setup menu  
Firmware Version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
U
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NThe Retouch Menu:  
CreatingRetouchedCopies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch  
menu) tab.  
G button  
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or  
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only  
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is  
inserted in the camera.  
Option  
0
i
j
k
D-Lighting  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
Monochrome  
Filter effects  
Color balance  
Image overlay 1  
NEF (RAW) processing  
Resize  
319  
320  
321  
322  
322  
323  
324  
327  
329  
64  
l
m
n
o
7
8
9
Edit movie  
Side-by-side comparison 2  
p
331  
Options that can not be applied to current image are grayed out and unavailable.  
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.  
2 Only available if J is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or  
original is displayed.  
U
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1 Choose a picture.  
Display the desired picture in  
full-frame playback (0 204).  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created  
with other devices.  
2 Display the retouch menu.  
Press J to display the retouch  
menu.  
A See Also  
See page 227 for information on using the J button with the WT-4  
wireless transmitter.  
3 Display retouch options.  
Highlight the desired item in  
the retouch menu and press J.  
U
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section for the selected item. To  
return to full-frame playback without creating a retouched  
copy, press K.  
A Monitor off Delay  
The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are  
performed for 20 s. The delay can be adjusted with Custom Setting  
c4 (Monitor off delay).  
5 Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched copy.  
Retouched copies are indicated by a N  
icon.  
A Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu  
The photographs to be retouched can also be selected from the retouch  
menu.  
2
2
Highlight an option  
Highlight a picture  
Create retouched copy  
of selected picture.  
and press 2.  
and press J.  
U
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Retouching Copies  
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch  
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie  
each option can only be applied once (note that multiple edits may  
result in loss of detail). Options that can not be applied to the current  
image are grayed out and unavailable.  
A Image Quality  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF  
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are  
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW)  
photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created  
from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the  
same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used when copies  
are saved in JPEG format.  
U
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
D-Lighting  
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit  
photographs.  
Before  
After  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of  
correction performed. The effect can be  
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy  
the photograph.  
U
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Red-Eye Correction  
This option is used to correct “red-eye”  
caused by the flash, and is available only with  
photographs taken using the flash. The  
photograph selected for red-eye correction is  
previewed as shown at right. Confirm the  
effects of red-eye correction and create a  
copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye  
correction may not always produce the expected results and may  
in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that  
are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before  
proceeding.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X button to zoom in,  
Zoom in  
X
W button to zoom out.  
While photo is zoomed in,  
use multi selector to view  
areas of image not visible  
Zoom out  
W
in monitor. Keep multi  
selector pressed to scroll  
View other  
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation  
window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi  
selector is pressed; area currently visible in  
monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to  
cancel zoom.  
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected  
photograph, a copy will be created that has been  
processed to reduce its effects. No copy will be  
created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.  
areas of image  
Cancel zoom  
Create copy  
J
J
U
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Trim  
Create a cropped copy of the selected  
photograph. The selected photograph is  
displayed with the selected crop shown in  
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in  
the following table.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press the W button to reduce the size  
of the crop.  
Reduce size of crop  
W
Press the X button to increase the size  
of the crop.  
Increase size of crop  
X
Rotate the main command dial to  
switch between aspect ratios of 3 : 2,  
4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Change crop aspect ratio  
Use multi selector to move the crop to  
another area of the image.  
Move crop  
Press center of multi selector to  
preview cropped image.  
Preview crop  
Create copy  
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
A Trim: Image Quality and Size  
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos  
have an image quality (0 68) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from  
JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the  
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.  
Aspect  
ratio  
Possible sizes  
3 : 2 3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424  
4 : 3 3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480  
5 : 4 3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480  
1 : 1 2,560 × 2,560, 1,920 × 1,920, 1,440 × 1,440, 960 × 960, 720 × 720, 480 × 480  
16 : 9 3,424 × 1,920, 2,560 × 1,440, 1,920 × 1,080, 1,280 × 720, 960 × 536, 640 × 360  
U
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Monochrome  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,  
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white  
monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype  
displays a preview of the selected  
image; press 1 to increase color  
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J  
to create a monochrome copy.  
Increase  
saturation  
Decrease  
saturation  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Filter Effects  
Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter  
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight  
filter, making the picture less  
blue. The effect can be previewed  
in the monitor as shown at right.  
Skylight  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the  
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in  
the monitor.  
Warm filter  
U
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Color Balance  
Use the multi selector to create a copy with  
modified color balance as shown below. The  
effect is displayed in the monitor together  
with red, green, and blue histograms (0 210)  
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.  
Press J to copy the photograph.  
Increase amount of green  
Increase  
amount of  
blue  
Increase  
amount of  
amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the  
monitor, press the X button. The histogram will  
be updated to show data only for the portion of  
the image displayed in the monitor. While the  
image is zoomed in, press the L button to  
toggle back and forth between color balance  
and zoom. When zoom is selected, you can  
zoom in and out with the X and W buttons and scroll the image with  
the multi selector.  
U
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Image Overlay  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to  
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;  
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image  
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image  
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image  
quality and size (0 68, 71; all options are available). To create a  
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
1 Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in the  
retouch menu and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will  
be displayed, with Image 1  
highlighted.  
2 Display NEF (RAW) images.  
Press J. A picture selection  
dialog will be displayed.  
3 Select a photograph.  
Highlight the first photograph  
in the overlay. To view the  
highlighted photograph full  
frame, press and hold the X  
button (to view images in other  
locations, press W and select the desired card and folder as  
described on page 217). Press J to select the highlighted  
photograph and return to the preview display.  
U
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Select the second  
photograph.  
The selected image will appear  
as Image 1. Press 2 to  
highlight Image 2 and repeat  
steps 2–3 to select the second photo.  
5 Set gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2  
and optimize exposure for the  
overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to  
select the gain for image 1  
from values between 0.1 and  
2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0;  
selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain.  
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.  
6 Highlight the Preview  
column.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the  
Preview column.  
7 Preview the overlay.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
Overlay and press J (to save  
the overlay without displaying  
a preview, highlight Save and  
press J). To return to Step 5  
and select new photos or adjust gain, press W.  
U
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is  
displayed to save the overlay.  
After an overlay is created, the  
resulting image will be  
displayed full-frame in the  
monitor.  
+
D Image Overlay  
Only NEF (RAW) photographs created with the D300S can be selected  
for image overlay. Other images are not displayed in the selection  
screen. Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit-depth can be  
combined.  
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,  
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure  
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for  
white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for  
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when  
it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied. Overlays  
saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the  
NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the  
original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority  
compression.  
U
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
1 Select NEF (RAW)  
processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW)  
processing in the retouch  
menu and press 2 to display a  
picture selection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created  
with this camera.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a photograph (to  
view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press  
and hold the X button; to view  
images in other locations, press W and select the desired card  
and folder as described on page 217). Press J to select the  
highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.  
U
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.  
Choose image quality (0 68), image size (0 71), white  
balance (0 134), exposure compensation (0 118), a Picture  
Control (0 154; note that the Picture Control grid can not be  
displayed) and high ISO noise reduction (0 259), and color  
space (0 166) for the JPEG copy. Note that white balance is  
not available with multiple exposures or pictures created with  
image overlay and that exposure compensation increments  
differ from those used in shooting mode.  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
Exposure compensation  
Picture Control  
High ISO noise reduction  
Color space  
4 Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to  
create a JPEG copy of the  
selected photograph. To exit  
without copying the  
photograph, press the G  
button.  
U
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Resize  
Create small copies of selected photographs. Resize can be used  
during full-frame playback as described on page 316. If you select  
Resize in the retouch menu, you can resize multiple photographs  
as described below.  
1 Choose a destination.  
If two memory cards are  
inserted, you can choose a  
destination for the resized copy  
by highlighting Choose  
destination and pressing 2 (if  
only one card is inserted, proceed to Step 2).  
The menu shown at right will  
be displayed; highlight a card  
slot and press J.  
2 Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and  
press 2.  
The following options will be  
displayed; highlight an option  
and press J.  
Option Size (pixels) Option Size (pixels)  
2.5M 1920 × 1280 0.6M 960 × 640  
1.1M 1280 × 856 0.3M 640 × 424  
U
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and  
press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will  
be displayed; highlight  
pictures using the multi  
selector and press the center of  
the multi selector to select or  
deselect (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button; to  
view images in other locations, press W and select the  
desired card and folder as described on page 217). Selected  
pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection  
is complete.  
4 Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and  
press J to save the resized copies.  
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.  
A Image Quality  
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos  
have an image quality (0 68) of JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG  
photos have the same image quality as the original.  
U
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
G button ➜ N retouch menu  
Side-by-Side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This  
option is only available if the J button is pressed to display the  
retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame.  
❚❚Making a Side-by-Side Comparison  
1 Select a picture.  
Select a retouched copy  
(shown by a N icon) or a  
photograph that has been  
retouched in full-frame  
playback and press J.  
2 Select Side-by-side  
comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side  
comparison and press J.  
U
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Compare the copy with the  
Options used to  
create copy  
original.  
The source image is displayed  
on the left, the retouched copy  
on the right, with the options  
used to create the copy listed  
at the top of the display. Press  
4 or 2 to switch between the  
source image and the  
Source Retouched  
image  
copy  
retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame,  
press and hold the X button. If the copy was created from two  
images using Image overlay, press 1 or 3 to view the other  
source image. To exit to playback mode, press the K button.  
To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image  
displayed, press J.  
D Side-by-Side Comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a  
photograph that was protected (0 219), is on a locked memory card,  
has since been deleted or hidden (0 245), or contains embedded  
image authentication information (0 308).  
U
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OMy Menu: CreatingaCustomMenu  
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.  
G button  
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized  
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,  
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If  
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu  
(0 337).  
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.  
Adding Options to My Menu  
1 Select Add items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Add  
items and press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the  
menu containing the option  
you wish to add and press 2.  
U
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu  
item and press J.  
4 Position the new item.  
Press 1 or 3 to move the new  
item up or down in My Menu.  
Press J to add the new item.  
5 Add more items.  
The items currently displayed in My  
Menu are indicated by a check mark.  
Items indicated by a V icon can not be  
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select  
additional items.  
U
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Options from My Menu  
1 Select Remove items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.  
2 Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2to  
select or deselect. Selected  
items are indicated by a check  
mark.  
3 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J. A  
confirmation dialog will be  
displayed.  
4 Delete the selected items.  
Press J to delete the selected  
items.  
A Deleting Items in My Menu  
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O  
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to  
remove the selected item from My Menu.  
U
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reordering Options in My Menu  
1 Select Rank items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.  
2 Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to  
move and press J.  
3 Position the item.  
Press 1or 3to move the  
item up or down in My Menu  
and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3  
to reposition additional items.  
U
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Recent Settings  
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent  
settings for O My Menu > Choose tab.  
1 Select Choose tab.  
In My Menu (O), highlight  
Choose tab and press 2.  
2 Select m Recent settings.  
Highlight m Recent settings  
and press J. The name of the  
menu will change from “MY  
MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.”  
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu  
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O My Menu for  
m Recent settings > Choose tab.  
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press  
the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to  
delete the selected item.  
U
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n
Technical Notes  
– Camera Care, Options, and Resources  
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,  
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error  
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.  
Compatible Lenses................................................................340  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ....................................347  
Other Accessories..................................................................352  
Caring for the Camera ..........................................................357  
Storage ......................................................................................................357  
Cleaning....................................................................................................357  
The Low-Pass Filter................................................................................358  
“Clean Now”......................................................................................358  
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”.....................................................359  
Manual Cleaning.............................................................................361  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..................364  
Defaults...................................................................................368  
Exposure Program.................................................................372  
Troubleshooting....................................................................373  
Error Messages.......................................................................378  
Specifications.........................................................................385  
Approved Memory Cards.....................................................393  
Memory Card Capacity.........................................................394  
Battery Life .............................................................................396  
n
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compatible Lenses  
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended for use  
with the D300S. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of  
CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel.  
Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
Compatible CPU Lenses 1  
Camera setting  
Exposure  
mode  
Focus mode  
Metering system  
M (with  
electronic  
rangefinder)  
a
Z
b
S
C
P
S
A
M
M
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
Type G or D AF NIKKOR2  
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR  
PC-E NIKKOR series  
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D5  
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter7  
Other AF NIKKOR  
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
4
4
4
4
3, 4  
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
4
6
3, 4  
3
✔
8
8
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
9
9
3
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
(except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
10  
—
✔
✔
1 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.  
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.  
3 Spot metering meters selected focus point.  
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
5 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work  
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than  
the maximum aperture is used.  
6 Manual exposure mode only.  
7 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 341).  
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
n
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–  
70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at  
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte  
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in  
viewfinder is in focus.  
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter  
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and  
AF-I lenses:  
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1 • AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED  
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II  
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II  
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2  
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2  
1 Autofocus not supported.  
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2  
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G  
ED VR II  
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR  
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2  
2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/  
TC-20E II.  
A Lens f-number  
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.  
n
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Non-CPU Lenses 1  
Non-CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses  
without a built-in CPU. The following is a list of compatible non-  
CPU lenses and accessories.  
Camera setting  
Exposure  
mode  
Focus mode  
Metering system  
M (with  
electronic  
rangefinder)  
a
Z
b
S
C
P
S
A
M
M
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR or  
Nikon Series E lenses2  
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4  
Reflex-NIKKOR  
3
4
5
6
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
7
4
9
4
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
—
8
✔
PC-NIKKOR  
✔
✔
6
AI-type Teleconverter10  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing  
Attachment12  
✔
✔
✔
11  
5
11  
13  
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
Auto extension rings (PK-  
series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)  
11  
4
✔
—
✔
1
2
Some lenses can not be used (see page 343).  
Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera  
body. Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on  
camera.  
3
4
With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 195), aperture  
value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.  
Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using  
Non-CPU lens data (0 195). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired  
results are not achieved.  
5
6
7
For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using  
Non-CPU lens data (0 195).  
Can be used in manual exposure mode at shutter speeds slower than flash sync  
speed by one step or more.  
8
9
Electronic rangefinder can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto  
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE  
lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens  
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.  
10 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–  
105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See  
teleconverter manual for details.  
n
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
12 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required  
depending on camera orientation.  
13 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture  
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking  
photograph.  
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.  
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
If lens data are specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 195), many of the  
features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU  
lenses. If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be  
used, and center-weighted metering is used when matrix metering is  
selected.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes g and h, when  
aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum  
aperture has not been specified using Non-CPU lens data, the camera  
aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum  
aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture  
ring. Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure  
modes e and f. The exposure-mode indicator (e or f) in the control  
panel will blink, and F will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following can NOT be used with the D300S:  
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter  
• Non-AI lenses  
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm  
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,  
AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900  
or earlier)  
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers  
851001–906200)  
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers  
142361–143000)  
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing  
unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,  
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)  
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,  
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
• 2.1cm f/4  
• Extension Ring K2  
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers  
174041–174180)  
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers • Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers  
200111–200310)  
174031–174127)  
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers  
280001–300490)  
n
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 16–  
300 mm. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a  
minimum range of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not be used in the macro range  
of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire  
subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:  
Lens  
Zoom position  
18 mm  
20 mm  
18 mm  
20 mm  
16 mm  
24 mm  
24 mm  
18 mm  
18 mm  
18 mm  
20 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
Minimum range  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
0.7 m/2 ft. 4 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
0.7 m/2 ft. 4 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED  
AF 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D ED  
AF-S DX 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF-S DX VR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5 ED  
(when not tilted or shifted)  
24 mm  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be  
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.  
The built-in flash can also be used with AI-S, AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR,  
Nikon Series E and non-CPU lenses with a focal length of 16–300mm. AI  
50–300mm f/4.5, modified AI 50–300mm f/4.5, and AI-S 50–300mm  
f/4.5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 135 mm or above, and  
AI 50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 105mm or above.  
D Red-Eye Reduction  
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist illuminator may  
interfere with red-eye reduction.  
n
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D AF-Assist Illumination  
The AF-assist illumination is available with lenses with focal lengths of  
24–200mm. It can not however be used to assist the focus operation  
with the following lenses:  
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED  
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED  
At ranges under 0.7m (2ft. 4in.), the following lenses may block the AF-  
assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
• AF Micro 200mm f/4D ED  
• AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED • AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF Micro 70–180mm f/4.5–5.6D ED • AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED  
At ranges under 1.1m (3ft. 7in.), the following lens may block the AF-  
assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
• AF-S DX VR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED  
At ranges under 1.5m (4ft. 11in.), the following lenses may block the AF-  
assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D  
• AF 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S VR 70–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED  
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED  
At ranges under 2.3m (7ft. 7in.), the following lens may block the AF-  
assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
• AF VR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED  
n
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Calculating Picture Angle  
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size  
of the area exposed by the D300S, in contrast, is approximately  
23.6 × 15.8 mm, meaning that the diagonal picture angle of a 35mm  
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D300S. To calculate the  
focal length of lenses for the D300S in 35mm format, multiply the focal  
length of the lens by 1.5 (for example, the effective focal length of a  
24mm lens in 35mm format would be 36 mm when mounted on the  
D300S).  
Picture size (35mm format)  
(36 × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D300S)  
(23.6 × 15.8 mm)  
Picture angle (35mm format)  
Picture angle (D300S)  
n
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Flash Units  
(Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and  
can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units  
can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described  
below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash  
units with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and  
SB-400.  
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.  
2 Mount the flash unit on the  
accessory shoe.  
See the manual provided with the flash  
unit for details. The built-in flash will not  
fire when an optional flash unit is  
attached.  
A The Sync Terminal  
A sync cable can be connected to the sync  
terminal as required. Do not connect another  
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear-  
curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit  
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.  
n
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved  
communication between the camera and compatible flash units  
for improved flash photography.  
❚❚CLS-Compatible Flash Units  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash  
units:  
• The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
Guide  
No. 3  
SB-900 1  
ISO 100 34/111  
ISO 200 48/157  
SB-800  
38/125  
53/174  
SB-600  
30/98  
42/138  
SB-400  
21/69  
30/98  
SB-R200 2  
10/33  
14/46  
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when v or N (flash) is selected for  
white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white  
balance appropriately.  
2 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional  
SB-900 or SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.  
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;  
SB-900 with standard illumination.  
• SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLS-  
compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for  
remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units. The  
SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.  
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide  
Number by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide  
Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35mm zoom head position); its range at an  
aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,  
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO  
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two  
(approximately 1.4).  
n
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following features are available with the above flash units:  
Flash unit  
Advanced Wireless Lighting  
Commander Remote  
SB-900  
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200  
SB-900  
SB-900  
Flash mode/feature  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash  
for digital SLR  
Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
GN Range-priority manual  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 8  
FV lock  
AF-assist for multi-area AF 9  
Flash Color Information  
Communication  
2
2
3
i-TTL  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
4
6
5
5
5
AA  
A
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
5
5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
7
M
RPT  
✔
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
REAR  
Y
Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
Power zoom  
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.  
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected  
with flash unit.  
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.  
4 Selected with flash unit. Non-TTL auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens  
is attached without specifying lens data using Non-CPU lens data.  
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit. Non-TTL  
auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached without specifying  
lens data using Non-CPU lens data.  
6 Selected with flash unit.  
7 Can be selected with camera.  
8 Select 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync  
speed, 0 281).  
9 CPU lens required.  
n
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual  
modes. If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button  
will lock and no photographs can be taken.  
Flash unit SB-80DX,  
SB-28DX,  
SB-30,SB-27 1,  
SB-22S, SB-22,  
SB-20,  
SB-16B, SB-15  
SB-23,SB-29 2,  
SB-21B 2,  
SB-29S 2  
SB-50DX  
SB-28, SB-26,  
SB-25, SB-24  
Flash mode  
A
Non-TTL auto  
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
M
G
Manual  
Repeating flash  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash  
unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).  
2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit  
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR  
cameras. The D300S is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200.  
At values over 3200, the desired results may not be achieved at some  
ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about  
three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full  
power and the photograph may be underexposed.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash  
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We  
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot  
and view the results in the monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash  
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may  
produce incorrect exposure.  
n
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)  
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction,  
while the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist  
illumination with the following restrictions:  
• SB-900: AF-assist illumination is  
available for all focus points;  
17–19 mm 20–105 mm 106–135 mm  
with 17–135 mm AF lenses,  
however, autofocus is not  
available with the focus points  
shown in gray.  
• SB-800, SB-600 and SU-800: With  
24–105 mm AF lenses, AF-  
assist illumination is not  
available with the focus points  
shown in gray.  
24–34 mm  
35–49 mm 50–105 mm  
With other flash units, the camera AF-assist illuminator is used for AF-  
assist illumination and red-eye reduction.  
In programmed auto, the  
maximum aperture (minimum f-  
number) is limited according to  
sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as  
shown at right.  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
200  
400  
800  
1600  
3200  
5
5.6  
7.1  
8
10  
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V  
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,  
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a  
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for more information.  
n
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for  
the D300S.  
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL3e (0 22, 24).  
• Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D10: The MB-D10 is equipped  
with a shutter-release button, B button, multi selector,  
and main- and sub-command dials for improved  
operation when taking photographs in portrait (tall)  
orientation. When attaching the MB-D10, remove contact  
Power sources cover for the MB-D10 from the camera. A BL-3 battery-  
chamber cover is required when using EN-EL4a or EN-EL4  
batteries.  
• Quick Charger MH-18a (0 22): The MH-18a can be used to  
recharge EN-EL3e battery.  
• AC Adapter EH-5a/EH-5: These AC adapters can be used to  
power the camera for extended periods.  
• Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless  
and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera  
memory card can be viewed by computers on the same  
network or copied to a computer for long-term storage.  
The camera can also be controlled from any computer on  
the network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available  
Wireless LAN  
adapters  
separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an independent  
power source; an EH-6 AC adapter or a second EN-EL3e  
battery is recommended. See the WT-4 manual for details.  
n
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-20C: To accommodate  
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are  
available with diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and  
+3 m–1. Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired  
focus can not be achieved with the built-in diopter  
adjustment control (–2 to +1 m–1). Test diopter  
adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the  
desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not  
be used with diopter adjustment lenses.  
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M: The DK-21M magnifies the view  
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.17 × (50 mm  
f/1.4 lens at infinity; –1.0 m–1) for greater precision when  
framing.  
• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in  
the viewfinder. Use for close-up photography, copying,  
telephoto lenses, and other tasks that call for added  
precision. DK-22 eyepiece adapter (available separately)  
required.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching  
the DG-2 magnifier to the D300S.  
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches to the  
viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in  
the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera  
is in the horizontal shooting position.  
n
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-on,  
slip-in, and rear-interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters  
manufactured by other makers may interfere with  
autofocus or electronic range finding.  
• The D300S can not be used with linear polarizing filters.  
Use the C-PL circular polarizing filter instead.  
• Use NC and L37C filters to protect the lens.  
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended  
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when  
a bright light source is in the frame.  
Filters  
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters  
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,  
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,  
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for  
details.  
• Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400  
Optional flash • Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200  
units  
• Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800  
See page 348 for more information.  
• Water Guard WG-AS2: The optional WG-AS2 is a water guard  
that covers the base of SB-900 flash units mounted on the  
D300S, increasing the SB-900’s splash resistance by  
protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and  
spray.  
Water guards  
• EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows  
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in  
PCMCIA card slots.  
PC card  
adapters  
n
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such  
advanced editing features as selection control points and  
an auto retouch brush.  
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a  
computer and save photographs directly to the computer  
hard disk.  
• Image Authentication: Determine whether photographs  
taken with image authentication (0 308) on have been  
modified after shooting.  
Software  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon  
software offers an auto update feature when the computer is  
connected to the Internet. See the websites listed on page xxiv  
for the latest information on supported operating systems.  
• BF-1B and BF-1A Body Caps: The body cap keeps the mirror,  
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a  
lens is not in place.  
Body cap  
n
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The D300S is equipped with a ten-  
pin remote terminal for remote  
control and automatic  
photography. The terminal is  
provided with a cap, which protects  
the contacts when the terminal is  
not in use. The following  
accessories can be used (all lengths are approximate):  
• Remote Cord MC-22: Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,  
and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter-  
triggering device, allowing control via sound or electronic  
signals (length 1 m/3 ft. 3 in.).  
• Remote Cord MC-30: Remote shutter release; can be used to  
reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft. 7 in.).  
• Remote Cord MC-36: Remote shutter release; can be used for  
interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or  
keep the shutter open during a time exposure (length 85  
cm/2 ft. 9 in.).  
• Extension Cord MC-21: Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series  
20, 22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can be used at a  
time (length 3 m/9 ft. 10 in.).  
Remote  
terminal  
accessories  
• Connecting Cord MC-23: Connects two cameras for  
simultaneous operation (length 40 cm/1 ft. 4 in.).  
• Adapter Cord MC-25: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for  
connection to devices with two-pin terminals, including  
the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2  
modulite control set (length 20 cm/8 in.).  
• GPS Unit GP-1 (0 198): Record latitude, longitude, altitude,  
and UTC time with pictures.  
• GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (0 198): Connects GPS devices to  
D300S via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS  
device, allowing GPS data to be recorded with  
photographs (length 35 cm/1 ft. 2 in.).  
• Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote  
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft. 3 in.).  
n
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace  
the monitor cover, remove the battery, and store the battery in a  
cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or  
mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not  
store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in  
locations that:  
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic  
fields, such as televisions or radios  
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below  
–10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a  
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,  
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled  
water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign  
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under  
warranty.  
Camera  
body  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and  
lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
Lens,  
mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove  
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens  
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing  
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this  
Monitor  
could result in damage or malfunction.  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
n
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted  
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or  
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the  
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The  
filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or  
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is  
turned on or off.  
❚❚ “Clean Now”  
1 Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most effective  
when the camera is placed base down as  
shown at right.  
2 Display the Clean  
G button  
image sensor menu.  
Press G to display the  
menus. Highlight Clean  
image sensor in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
n
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and press  
2.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed while cleaning is in progress.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed when cleaning is complete.  
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
1 Select Clean at startup/  
shutdown.  
Display the Clean image  
sensor menu as described in  
Step 2 on the previous page.  
Highlight Clean at startup/  
shutdown and press 2.  
n
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select an option.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J.  
Option  
Description  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned  
each time the camera is turned on.  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned  
during shutdown each time the camera is  
turned off.  
5 Clean at startup  
Clean at  
6
shutdown  
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at  
7
8
& shutdown  
Cleaning off  
startup and at shutdown.  
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor  
cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is on.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be  
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean  
the image sensor manually (0 361) or consult a Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image  
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s  
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.  
n
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using  
the Clean image sensor (0 358) option in the setup menu, the  
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,  
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon  
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or  
cleaning the low-pass filter. If the battery level is below J  
(60%), turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL3e  
battery or connect an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter.  
2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.  
Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in  
the setup menu and press 2 (note that  
this option is not available at battery  
levels of J or below).  
3 Press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed in the monitor and a row of  
dashes will appear in the control panel  
and viewfinder. To restore normal  
operation without inspecting the low-  
pass filter, turn the camera off.  
n
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release  
button all the way down.  
The mirror will be raised and  
the shutter curtain will open,  
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will  
turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink.  
5 Examine the low-pass filter.  
Holding the camera so that light falls on  
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for  
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are  
present, proceed to Step 7.  
6 Clean the filter.  
Remove any dust and lint from the filter  
with a blower. Do not use a blower-  
brush, as the bristles could damage the  
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a  
blower can only be removed by Nikon-  
authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should  
you touch or wipe the filter.  
7 Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter  
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.  
n
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers  
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To  
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:  
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source  
while the mirror is raised.  
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and  
the self-timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close  
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning  
or inspection immediately.  
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from  
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and  
shipping. The D300S, however, is designed to be used with  
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when  
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign  
matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in  
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera  
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign  
matter that may be adhering to the body cap.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter  
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service  
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on  
the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately;  
0
355) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging  
applications.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon  
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or  
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be  
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these  
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly  
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories  
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,  
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.  
n
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera and  
Battery: Cautions  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or  
vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed  
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal  
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as  
occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause  
condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the  
device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden  
changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the  
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or  
magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by  
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,  
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal  
circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun  
or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may  
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in  
photographs.  
n
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove  
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the  
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth  
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In  
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or  
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon  
return to normal.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently  
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other  
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0 358, 361) for information on cleaning the low-  
pass filter.  
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily  
damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the  
curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents  
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.  
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-  
ventilated area. If the product will not be used for an extended period,  
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic  
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a  
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that  
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be  
replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a  
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before  
putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before  
putting the battery away.  
n
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not  
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while  
images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these  
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory  
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is  
connected.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit  
or that do not light. This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not  
indicate a malfunction. Images recorded with the product are unaffected.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or  
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.  
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois  
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching  
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.  
Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it  
unattended.  
n
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from  
functioning and should be removed with a soft, dry cloth before use.  
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling batteries:  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe  
due caution when handling the battery.  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
After removing the battery from the camera, be sure to replace the  
terminal cover.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important  
occasions, ready a spare EN-EL3e battery and keep it fully charged.  
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement  
batteries on short notice.  
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the  
battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold  
weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as  
necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery  
performance.  
Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in  
accord with local regulations.  
n
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Defaults  
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed  
below. For information on two-button resets, see page 182.  
❚❚Playback Menu Defaults  
Option  
Playback folder (0 244)  
Image review (0 251)  
After delete (0 251)  
Rotate tall (0 251)  
Default  
D300S  
Off  
Show next  
Off  
Slide show (0 252)  
Frame interval (0 252)  
2 s  
❚❚Shooting Menu Defaults 1  
Option  
File naming (0 258)  
Default  
DSC  
Primary slot selection (0 72)  
Secondary slot function (0 72)  
Image quality (0 68)  
Image size (0 71)  
CF card slot  
Overflow  
JPEG normal  
Large  
JPEG compression (0 70)  
NEF (RAW) recording (0 70)  
Type  
Size priority  
Lossless compressed  
NEF (RAW) bit depth  
White balance (0 134)  
Fine tuning (0 137)  
12-bit  
Auto  
Off  
Choose color temp. (0 141)  
Set Picture Control (0 154)  
Color space (0 166)  
Active D-Lighting (0 165)  
Long exp. NR (0 258)  
High ISO NR (0 259)  
5000 K  
Standard  
sRGB  
Off  
Off  
Normal  
ISO sensitivity settings (0 96)  
ISO sensitivity (0 96)  
ISO sensitivity auto control (0 98)  
200  
Off  
n
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Live view mode (0 49, 52)  
Multiple exposure (0 184)  
Movie settings (0 62)  
Quality  
Microphone  
Destination  
Tripod  
Reset 2  
640 × 424 (3 : 2)  
Auto sensitivity (A)  
CF card slot  
Interval timer shooting (0 189)  
Reset 3  
1 Default settings can be restored using Reset shooting menu (0 256).  
With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting,  
only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.  
2 Applies to all banks. Reset shooting menu can not be selected while  
shooting is in progress.  
3 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed.  
❚❚Custom Settings Menu Defaults *  
Option  
Default  
Release  
Focus  
a1 AF-C priority selection (0 263)  
a2 AF-S priority selection (0 264)  
a3 Dynamic AF area (0 264)  
a4 Focus tracking with lock-on (0 266)  
a5 AF activation (0 266)  
a6 AF point illumination (0 266)  
a7 Focus point wrap-around (0 267)  
a8 AF point selection (0 267)  
a9 Built-in AF-assist illuminator (0 268)  
a10 AF-ON for MB-D10 (0 269)  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value (0 270)  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl. (0 270)  
b3 Exp comp/fine tune (0 270)  
b4 Easy exposure compensation (0 271)  
b5 Center-weighted area (0 272)  
b6 Fine tune optimal exposure (0 272)  
Matrix metering  
9 points  
Normal  
Shutter/AF-ON  
Auto  
No wrap  
51 points  
On  
AF-ON  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
Off  
ø 8 mm  
0
0
0
Center-weighted metering  
Spot metering  
n
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Default  
Off  
6 s  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L (0 273)  
c2 Auto meter-off delay (0 273)  
c3 Self-timer (0 273)  
10 s  
c4 Monitor off delay (0 274)  
Playback  
10 s  
Menus  
20 s  
Information display  
10 s  
Image review  
4 s  
d1 Beep (0 275)  
High  
d2 Viewfinder grid display (0 275)  
d3 Viewfinder warning display (0 275)  
d4 Screen tips (0 276)  
Off  
On  
On  
d5 CL mode shooting speed (0 276)  
d6 Max. continuous release (0 276)  
d7 File number sequence (0 277)  
d8 Information display (0 278)  
d9 LCD illumination (0 278)  
d10 Exposure delay mode (0 278)  
d11 MB-D10 battery type (0 279)  
d12 Battery order (0 280)  
e1 Flash sync speed (0 281)  
e2 Flash shutter speed (0 282)  
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash (0 283)  
e4 Modeling flash (0 289)  
e5 Auto bracketing set (0 289)  
e6 Auto bracketing (Mode M) (0 290)  
e7 Bracketing order (0 290)  
f1 D switch (0 291)  
3 fps  
100  
On  
Auto  
Off  
Off  
LR6 (AA alkaline)  
Use MB-D10 batteries first  
1/250 s  
1/60 s  
TTL  
On  
AE & flash  
Flash/speed  
MTR > under > over  
LCD backlight (D)  
f2 Multi selector center button (0 291)  
Shooting mode  
Playback mode  
f3 Multi selector (0 292)  
Select center focus point  
Thumbnail on/off  
Do nothing  
f4 Photo info/playback (0 292)  
Info /Playback  
n
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Default  
f5 Assign Fn button (0 292)  
Fn button press  
None  
Fn button + dials  
Auto bracketing  
f6 Assign preview button (0 296)  
Preview button press  
Preview + command dials  
f7 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 296)  
AE-L/AF-L button press  
AE-L/AF-L + command dials  
f8 Customize command dials (0 297)  
Reverse rotation (0 297)  
Preview  
None  
AE/AF lock  
None  
No  
Change main/sub (0 297)  
Aperture setting (0 297)  
Menus and playback (0 298)  
f9 Release button to use dial (0 298)  
f10 No memory card? (0 299)  
f11 Reverse indicators (0 299)  
Off  
Sub-command dial  
Off  
No  
Enable release  
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using  
Reset custom settings (0 262).  
❚❚Setup Menu Defaults  
Option  
LCD brightness (0 301)  
Clean image sensor  
Default  
0
Clean at startup/shutdown  
HDMI (0 302)  
Cleaning off  
Auto  
Time zone and date (0 302)  
Daylight saving time  
Auto image rotation (0 304)  
Image authentication (0 308)  
GPS (0 201)  
Off  
On  
Off  
Auto meter off  
Eye-Fi upload (0 313)  
Enable  
Enable  
n
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Program  
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the  
following graph:  
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum  
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)  
f/1  
f/1.4  
f/2  
f/2.8  
f/4  
f/5.6  
f/8  
f/11  
f/16  
f/22  
f/32  
8"  
30" 15"  
4" 2" 1"  
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity;  
the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent.  
When matrix metering is used, values over 171/3 EV are reduced to  
171/3 EV.  
n
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of  
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
❚❚Display  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter  
adjustment lenses (0 36, 353).  
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 22, 37).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2  
(Auto meter-off delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0 273, 274).  
Unusual characters displayed in control panel: See “A Note on Electronically-  
Controlled Cameras,” below.  
Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response times  
and brightness of these displays varies with temperature.  
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is  
highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do  
not indicate a malfunction.  
A A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the  
control panel and the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this  
phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the  
camera off, remove and replace the battery, and turn the camera on  
again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),  
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In  
the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-  
authorized service representative. Note that disconnecting the power  
source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to  
the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already  
recorded to the card will not be affected.  
n
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚Shooting  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
• Memory card is full or not inserted (0 31, 38).  
• Memory card is locked (SD cards only; 0 35).  
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest  
f-number. If B is displayed in control panel, select Aperture ring for  
Custom Setting f8 (Customize command dials) > Aperture setting to  
use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0 297).  
• Exposure mode S selected with A selected for shutter speed  
(0 380).  
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting  
d10 (Exposure delay mode; 0 278).  
Photos are out of focus:  
• Rotate focus-mode selector to S or C (0 74).  
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock  
(0 80, 83).  
• Tripod selected in live view: camera will not focus when shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. Use AF-ON button (0 50).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be  
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using  
optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit, choose 1/320 s  
(Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for full range of shutter speeds (0 281).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in  
focus mode C: use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus (0 81).  
Can not select focus point:  
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 78).  
• Auto-area AF selected for focus mode: choose another mode (0 76).  
• Camera is in playback mode (0 203).  
• Menus are in use (0 243).  
• Press shutter-release button halfway to turn monitor off or activate  
exposure meters (0 39).  
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 68).  
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off  
(0 258).  
n
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beep does not sound:  
• Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 275).  
• Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (0 86).  
• Camera is in focus mode C or M (0 74).  
• Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection;  
0 264).  
• Movie is being recorded (0 58).  
Photos not recorded in live view mode:  
• Sound of mirror clicking down when shutter-release button was pressed  
halfway in hand-held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter (0 54).  
• Unless Release is chosen for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority  
selection), shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when  
focus mode S is selected in hand-held mode (0 54, 264).  
Randomly-spaced bright pixels, reddish areas, or other irregularities (“noise”) appear in  
photos:  
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction (0 96, 259).  
• Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: use long exposure noise reduction  
(0 258).  
• Reddish areas or other artifacts appear in long time-exposures: turn long  
exposure noise reduction on when shooting at a shutter speed of  
“A” (0 258).  
AF-assist illuminator does not light:  
• Camera is in focus mode C (0 74).  
• Center focus point is not selected for single-point AF or dynamic-area AF  
(0 76).  
• Off selected for Custom Setting a9 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator)  
(0 268).  
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot  
with continued use; wait for lamp to cool down.  
Photos are blotched or smeared:  
• Clean lens.  
• Clean low-pass filter (0 358).  
Colors are unnatural:  
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 134).  
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 154).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 145).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created  
with D300S (0 148).  
n
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White balance bracketing unavailable:  
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality  
(0 68).  
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 187).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for  
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of  
photographs, choose a setting other than A (auto) (0 158).  
Can not adjust Picture Control contrast or brightness: Contrast and brightness can  
not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting is on. Turn Active D-Lighting off.  
Metering can not be changed: Live view is in progress, autoexposure lock is in  
effect, or movie is being recorded (0 54, 61, 116).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g  
(0 118).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting  
mode: Lower built-in flash (0 173).  
Sound is not recorded with movies:  
• Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone.  
• External microphone is disconnected during recording.  
❚❚Playback  
Flashing areas, shooting data, or graphs appear on images: Press 1 or 3 to choose  
photo information displayed, or change settings for Display mode  
(0 207, 247).  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +  
JPEG (0 69).  
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other  
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.  
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder  
(0 245).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 251).  
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 304).  
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 206).  
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 304).  
Can not delete photo: Photo is protected. Remove protection (0 219).  
Can not retouch picture: Picture was not created with D300S (0 316).  
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for  
Playback folder (0 245).  
n
376  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Can not change print order:  
• Memory card is full: delete photos (0 38, 220).  
• Memory card is locked (SD cards only; 0 35).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG  
copy using NEF (RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print using  
ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately).  
Can not print photos:  
• Memory card is locked (SD cards only; 0 35).  
• NEF (RAW) photos can not be printed by direct USB connection. Create  
JPEG copy using NEF (RAW) processing (0 327) or transfer to computer  
and print using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;  
0 355).  
Photo is not displayed on TV: Choose correct video mode (0 301).  
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device Confirm that HDMI cable  
:
(available separately) is connected (0 241).  
NEF (RAW) photos not displayed in Capture NX: Update to Capture NX 2 (0 355).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor  
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off  
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can  
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is  
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor  
cleaning is performed (0 305).  
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software  
does not display effects of Picture Controls or active D-Lighting. Use  
ViewNX (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX 2  
(available separately).  
Can not copy pictures to computer using Nikon Transfer: Operating system is not  
supported (0 224). Transfer pictures from the memory card using a card  
reader or card slot.  
❚❚Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 29).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain  
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that  
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional AC  
adapter (0 307)  
.
n
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in  
the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Lens aperture ring is  
not set to minimum  
aperture.  
Solution  
Set ring to minimum  
aperture (largest  
f-number).  
0
B
27  
(blinks)  
Ready a fully-charged  
spare battery.  
H
d
Low battery.  
37  
• Battery exhausted.  
• Recharge or replace  
battery.  
• Battery can not be  
used.  
• Contact Nikon-  
authorized service  
representative.  
• An extremely  
exhausted  
• Replace the battery,  
or recharge the  
battery if the  
rechargeable Li-ion  
battery is exhausted.  
H
d
xxiv, 22,  
24  
rechargeable Li-ion  
battery or a third-  
party battery is  
inserted either in the  
camera or in the  
optional MB-D10  
battery pack.  
(blinks) (blinks)  
B
—
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.  
29  
(blinks)  
n
378  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
No lens attached, or  
non-CPU lens attached  
without specifying  
maximum aperture.  
Aperture shown in  
stops from maximum  
aperture.  
Aperture value will be  
displayed if maximum  
aperture is specified.  
F
195  
D
Camera unable to focus  
—
Focus manually.  
83  
96  
(blinks) using autofocus.  
• Use a lower ISO  
sensitivity  
• In exposure mode:  
e Use optional ND  
filter  
f Increase shutter  
speed  
g Choose a smaller  
aperture (larger  
f-number)  
354  
108  
109  
Subject too bright;  
photo will be  
overexposed.  
q
n
379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
• Use a higher ISO  
sensitivity  
96  
• In exposure mode:  
e Use flash  
171  
108  
Subject too dark; photo  
will be underexposed.  
r
f Lower shutter  
speed  
g Choose a larger  
aperture (smaller  
f-number)  
109  
Change shutter speed  
or select manual  
exposure mode.  
A
(blinks)  
A selected in  
exposure mode f.  
108, 111  
350  
Optional flash unit that  
does not support i-TTL  
Change flash mode  
setting on optional  
flash unit.  
c
(blinks) flash control attached  
(blinks)  
and set to TTL.  
n
380  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Check photo in  
monitor; if  
underexposed, adjust  
settings and try again.  
If indicator blinks for 3s  
after flash fires, photo  
may be underexposed.  
c
—
172  
(blinks)  
Memory insufficient to • Reduce quality or  
68, 71  
n
x/  
y
record further photos  
at current settings, or  
camera has run out of  
file or folder numbers.  
size.  
j
(blinks)  
• Delete photographs.  
• Insert new memory  
card.  
220  
31  
(blinks)  
Release shutter. If error  
persists or appears  
Camera malfunction. frequently, consult  
Nikon-authorized  
O
(blinks)  
—
service representative.  
A The x and y Icons  
These icons flash to show the card affected.  
n
381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Camera cannot  
S detect memory  
card.  
Turn camera off and  
confirm that card is  
correctly inserted.  
No memory  
card.  
31  
• Error accessing  
memory card.  
• Use Nikon-  
approved card.  
• Check that contacts  
are clean. If card is  
damaged, contact  
retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
393  
—
This memory  
card cannot  
be used.  
Card may be  
damaged.  
Insert  
x/  
y
(blinks)  
• Unable to create • Delete files or insert 31, 220  
another card.  
new folder.  
new memory card.  
• Check that Eye-Fi  
card firmware is up  
to date.  
313  
Camera can not  
control Eye-Fi card. card to a computer  
or other device and  
• Copy files on Eye-Fi 31, 33  
g
y
(blinks)  
format card, or  
insert new card.  
Memory card  
is locked. Slide  
lock to “write”  
position.  
,
[A]  
y
SD memory card is Slide card write-  
35  
locked (write  
protected).  
protect switch to  
“write” position.  
(blinks)  
This card is not  
formatted.  
Format the  
card.  
[C]  
x/  
y
Memory card has Format memory card  
not been formatted or insert new memory 31, 34  
for use in camera. card.  
(blinks)  
n
382  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
Monitor  
panel  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Failed to  
update flash  
unit firmware.  
Flash cannot be  
used. Contact a  
Nikon-  
Firmware for flash  
unit mounted on  
camera was not  
updated correctly.  
Contact a Nikon-  
authorized service  
representative.  
—
—
authorized  
service  
representative.  
Select folder  
containing images  
No images on  
Folder  
contains no  
images.  
memory card or in from Playback folder  
folder(s) selected menu or insert  
—
—
31, 245  
for playback.  
different memory  
card.  
No images can be  
played back until  
another folder has  
All photos in  
All images are  
hidden.  
current folder are been selected or Hide  
245  
hidden.  
image used to allow  
at least one image to  
be displayed.  
File has been  
created or modified  
File does not  
contain image  
data.  
using a computer File can not be played  
or different make of back on camera.  
camera, or file is  
—
—
—
corrupt.  
Images created with  
Cannot select  
this file.  
Selected image can  
other devices can not  
not be retouched.  
316  
be retouched.  
n
383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Control  
Monitor  
panel  
Problem  
Solution  
0
• Movies created with  
other devices can  
The selected movie not be edited.  
can not be edited. • Movies must be at  
least two seconds  
—
This moviecan  
not be edited.  
—
65  
long.  
Check printer. To  
resume, select  
Continue (if  
Check printer.  
—
Printer error.  
229 *  
available).  
Insert paperof correct  
Paper in printer is  
Check paper.  
Paper jam.  
—
—
—
size and select  
229 *  
229 *  
229 *  
not of selected size.  
Continue.  
Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select  
printer.  
Continue.  
Insert paper of  
selected size and  
select Continue.  
Check ink. To resume,  
select Continue.  
Replace ink and select  
Continue.  
Printer is out of  
paper.  
Out of paper.  
Check ink  
supply.  
—
—
Ink error.  
229 *  
229 *  
Out of ink.  
Printer is out of ink.  
* See printer manual for more information.  
n
384  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
❚❚Nikon D300S Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)  
Lens mount  
Effective picture angle Approx. 1.5 × lens focal length (Nikon DX format)  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
12.3 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
23.6 × 15.8 mm CMOS sensor  
13.1 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data  
(requires optional Capture NX 2 software)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
• 4,288 × 2,848 (L)  
• 2,144 × 1,424 (S)  
• 3,216 × 2,136 (M)  
File format  
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,  
compressed, or uncompressed  
• TIFF (RGB)  
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),  
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)  
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality  
compression available  
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both  
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats  
Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid,  
Monochrome; selected Picture Control can be  
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls  
Media  
Type I CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA  
compliant); SD (Secure Digital) memory cards, SDHC  
compliant  
n
385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage  
Dual card slots  
Either card can be used for primary or backup storage  
or for separate storage of copies created using  
NEF+JPEG; pictures can be copied between cards.  
File system  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF  
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable  
Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras), PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder  
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical  
Approx. 0.94 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
)
19.5 mm (–1.0 m–1  
–2–+1 m–1  
)
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen  
with AF area brackets (framing grid can be displayed)  
Reflex mirror  
Quick return  
Depth-of-field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed, lens  
aperture is stopped down to value selected by user (g  
and h modes) or by camera (e and f modes)  
Lens aperture  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
• DX AF NIKKOR: All functions supported  
• Type G or D AF NIKKOR: All functions supported (PC  
Micro-NIKKOR does not support some functions). IX  
NIKKOR lenses not supported.  
• Other AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color  
matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.  
• AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color  
matrix metering II  
• Non-CPU: Can be used in exposure modes g and h;  
color matrix metering and aperture value display  
supported if user provides lens data (AI lenses only)  
Electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum  
aperture is f/5.6 or faster.  
n
386  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shutter  
Type  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane  
shutter  
Speed  
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250  
Flash sync speed  
X=1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/320 s or slower  
(flash range drops at speeds between 1/250 and 1/320 s)  
Release  
Release mode  
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH  
(continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release), E  
(self-timer), MUP (mirror up)  
Approximate frame  
advance rate  
(CIPA guidelines)  
• With EN-EL3e: 1–7 fps (CL) or 7 fps (CH)  
• With optional MB-D10 multi-power battery pack and EN-EL4a:  
1–7 (CL) or 8 fps (CH)  
Self-timer  
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration  
Exposure  
Metering  
TTL exposure metering using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor  
Metering method  
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D  
lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses);  
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses  
if user provides lens data  
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8 mm circle in  
center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed to  
6, 10, or 13 mm, or weighting can be based on  
average of entire frame (fixed at 8 mm when non-  
CPU lens is used)  
• Spot: Meters 3 mm circle (about 2% of frame) centered  
on selected focus point (on center focus point when  
non-CPU lens is used)  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI  
Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutter-  
priority auto (f); aperture-priority auto (g); manual (h)  
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV  
Exposure bracketing  
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV  
n
387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
Flash bracketing  
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV  
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3  
White balance  
bracketing  
ADL bracketing  
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–5  
frames using preset values for all frames  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L  
button  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
ISO 200 – 3200 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be  
set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent)  
below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO  
6400 equivalent) above ISO 3200; auto ISO sensitivity  
control available  
Active D-Lighting  
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal,  
Low, or Off  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 3500DX autofocus sensor module  
with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, 51 focus points  
(including 15 cross-type sensors), and AF-assist  
illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft.  
10 in.)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF  
(C); predictive focus tracking automatically activated  
according to subject status  
• Manual (MF): Electronic range finding supported  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Focus lock  
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points  
Single-point AF, dynamic-area AF, auto-area AF  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button  
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L  
button  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
Manual pop-up with button release and a Guide  
Number of 17/56 (m/ft., ISO 200, 20 °C/68 °F; GN at ISO  
100 is 12/39)  
n
388  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash  
Flash control  
• TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash  
for digital SLR using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor are  
available with built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, or SB-400  
• Auto aperture: Available with SB-900 or SB-800 and CPU  
lens  
• Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22S  
•
Distance-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800  
Flash mode  
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye  
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync  
Flash compensation  
Flash-ready indicator  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV  
Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit such as  
SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or  
SB-50DX is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full  
output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and  
safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in  
System (CLS)  
flash, SB-900, SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and  
SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 as remotes; Auto FP  
High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination  
supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except  
SB-400; Flash Color Information Communication and  
FV lock supported with all CLS-compatible flash units  
Sync terminal  
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight,  
flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 5 values can  
be stored), choose color temperature (2500 K–10000 K),  
all with fine tuning.  
Live view  
Modes  
Tripod, hand-held  
Autofocus  
• Tripod: Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame  
• Hand-held: Phase-detection TTL AF with 51 focus  
points (including 15 cross-type sensors)  
n
389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movie  
Frame size (pixels)  
• 1,280 × 720/24 fps  
• 320 × 216/24 fps  
• 640 × 424/24 fps  
File format  
Compression  
Audio  
AVI  
Motion-JPEG  
Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted  
Monitor  
Monitor  
3-in., 921k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT  
LCD with 170 ° viewing angle, 100% frame coverage,  
and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback  
with playback zoom, movie playback, slide show,  
highlights, histogram display, auto image rotation, and  
image comment (up to 36 characters)  
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be  
displayed on external device while camera monitor is on  
HDMI output  
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; camera monitor  
turns off when HDMI cable is connected  
Audio input  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)  
Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control, GP-1  
GPS unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183  
version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS  
adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin connector)  
Supported languages  
Supported languages  
Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Danish, Dutch,  
English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Japanese,  
Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian,  
Spanish, Swedish  
Power source  
Battery  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL3e battery  
n
390  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power source  
Battery pack  
Optional MB-D10 multi-power battery pack with one  
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or EN-EL4 Li-ion  
battery or eight AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium, or nickel-  
manganese batteries; EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 and AA batteries  
available separately; A BL-3 battery-chamber cover is  
required when using EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 batteries.  
AC adapter  
EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 147 × 114 × 74 mm (5.8 × 4.5 × 2.9 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 840 g (1 lb. 14 oz.) without battery, memory  
card, body cap, or monitor cover  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged  
battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and  
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.  
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes  
that this manual may contain.  
MH-18a quick charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V/900 mA  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Approx. 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully  
discharged  
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 90 × 35 × 58 mm (3.5 × 1.4 × 2.3 in.)  
Length of cord  
Weight  
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)  
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding power cable  
n
391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Type  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.4 V/1500 mAh  
Rated capacity  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 39.5 × 56 × 21 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)  
Weight Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding terminal cover  
A Supported Standards  
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a  
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure  
compatibility among different makes of camera.  
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard  
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the  
memory card.  
• Exif version 2.21: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File  
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which  
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color  
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.  
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital  
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output  
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.  
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for  
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices  
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-  
compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
n
392  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the  
D300S.  
• Type 1 CompactFlash memory cards  
Extreme IV  
Extreme III  
Ultra II  
Standard  
Professional UDMA 300 ×  
SDCFX4 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SDCFX3 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SanDisk  
SDCFH  
SDCFB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
4 GB  
233 ×  
133 ×  
80 ×  
60 ×  
Professional  
Lexar  
Media  
Platinum II  
• SD memory cards *  
SanDisk 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB †, 4 GB ‡, 8 GB ‡, 16 GB ‡  
Toshiba 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB †, 4 GB ‡, 8 GB ‡, 16 GB ‡, 32 GB ‡  
Panasonic 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB †, 4 GB ‡, 8 GB ‡, 16 GB ‡, 32 GB ‡  
512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB †, 4 GB ‡, 8 GB ‡  
Lexar  
Media  
Platinum II: 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB †, 4 GB ‡, 8 GB ‡, 16 GB ‡  
Professional: 1 GB, 2 GB †, 4 GB ‡, 8 GB ‡  
*
All cards listed can be used, regardless of speed.  
† If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that device supports  
2GB cards.  
‡ SDHC compliant. If card will be used with card reader or other device,  
check that device supports SDHC.  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above  
cards, please contact the manufacturer.  
n
393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures  
that can be stored on a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme IV (SDCFX4) card at  
different image quality and size settings.  
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 14-bit 3  
NEF (RAW),  
Image size  
—
12.1 MB  
14.9 MB  
10.5 MB  
197  
151  
270  
18  
30  
20  
—
—
Compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Compressed,  
14-bit 3  
NEF (RAW),  
Uncompressed,  
12-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
—
—
—
13.0 MB  
19.5 MB  
25.4 MB  
223  
197  
151  
45  
17  
19  
Uncompressed,  
14-bit 3  
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
36.6 MB  
20.6 MB  
9.3 MB  
6.0 MB  
3.4 MB  
1.5 MB  
3.0 MB  
1.7 MB  
0.8 MB  
1.5 MB  
0.9 MB  
0.4 MB  
105  
187  
416  
552  
976  
2100  
1000  
1800  
4100  
2100  
3600  
7800  
16  
19  
27  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine 4  
44  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
JPEG normal 4  
JPEG basic 4  
n
394  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.  
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 200.  
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression, ISO sensitivity is set  
to P or higher, High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or  
ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher, or long exposure noise reduction, active D-  
lighting, or image authentication is on.  
3 Maximum frame rate when recording 14-bit NEF (RAW) images is 2.5 fps.  
4 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal  
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer  
capacity drop accordingly.  
A d6—Max. Continuous Release (0 276)  
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single  
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100.  
n
395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries  
varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, and how the  
camera is used. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also varies with  
make and storage conditions; some batteries can not be used.  
Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D10 multi-power  
battery pack are given below.  
• CIPA standard 1  
One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 950 shots  
One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D10): Approximately 950 shots  
One EN-EL4a battery (MB-D10): Approximately 2000 shots  
Two EN-EL3e batteries (MB-D10): Approximately 1900 shots  
One EN-EL3e and one EN-EL4a battery (MB-D10): Approximately 2950 shots  
Eight AA batteries (MB-D10): Approximately 1200 shots  
• Nikon standard 2  
One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 3000 shots  
One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D10): Approximately 3000 shots  
One EN-EL4a battery (MB-D10): Approximately 5900 shots  
Two EN-EL3e batteries (MB-D10): Approximately 6000 shots  
One EN-EL3e and one EN-EL4a battery (MB-D10): Approximately 8900 shots  
Eight AA batteries (MB-D10): Approximately 3400 shots  
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S VR 24–120mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled  
from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default  
settings once every 30 s; flash fired once every other shot. Live view  
not used.  
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED lens  
under the following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG basic,  
image size set to M (medium), shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-release  
button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from  
infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then taken in  
succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned  
off; cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off.  
n
396  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
• Using the monitor  
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
• Repeated autofocus operations  
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs  
• Slow shutter speeds  
• Using the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter  
• Using the optional GP-1 GPS unit  
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e  
batteries:  
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce  
battery performance.  
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their  
charge if left unused.  
n
397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Symbols  
AE & flash  
(Auto bracketing set) .............. 120, 289  
AE only (Auto bracketing set) 120, 289  
AE-L............................................ 81, 116, 296  
AF............................................ 74, 76, 78, 82  
AF activation.......................................... 266  
AF area brackets....................... 11, 36, 55  
AF assist.................................. 43, 268, 345  
AF fine tune............................................ 312  
AF point illumination.......................... 266  
AF point selection................................ 267  
AF-area mode.......................................... 76  
AF-C priority selection ....................... 263  
B button ............................................. 75  
AF-On for MB-D10 ............................... 269  
AF-S priority selection........................ 264  
After Delete............................................ 251  
Amber ............................................ 138, 323  
Aperture........................................ 109–112  
Aperture-priority auto ....................... 109  
Approved memory cards .................. 393  
Aspect ratio............................................ 321  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button................... 296  
Assign Fn button.................................. 292  
Assign preview button....................... 296  
Attaching the lens ................................. 26  
Audio/video cable ........................... i, 239  
Auto (White balance).......................... 134  
Auto bracketing................. 120, 289, 290  
Auto bracketing (Mode M) ............... 290  
Auto bracketing set............................. 289  
Auto FP high-speed sync. ....... 281, 282  
Auto image rotation ........................... 304  
Auto meter off................................ 39, 273  
Auto meter-off delay .......................... 273  
Auto-area AF..................................... 76, 77  
Autofocus............................. 74, 76, 78, 82  
K (Single-point AF) ....................... 76, 77  
I (Dynamic-area AF) .......... 76, 77, 264  
H (Auto-area AF) ............................ 76, 77  
S ............................................ 74, 80, 86, 264  
CL.................................................. 86, 88, 276  
CH ........................................................... 86, 88  
J................................................................... 86  
E (Self-timer).................................... 86, 91  
MUP......................................................... 86, 93  
a (Matrix).............................................. 102  
Z (Center-weighted)................ 102, 272  
b (Spot) ................................................. 102  
e (Programmed auto) ........................ 106  
f (Shutter-priority auto) ................... 108  
g (Aperture-priority auto) ................ 109  
h (Manual).............................................. 111  
Q (Help) ............................................... 18, 21  
t (Memory buffer) .......................... 43, 89  
L (Preset manual)................... 134, 142  
R (Info) button................................ 12, 15  
a (Live view) button ..................... 48, 58  
D switch.......................................... 39, 278  
Numerics  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor...................... 170  
12-bit .......................................................... 70  
14-bit .......................................................... 70  
3D color matrix metering II.............. 103  
3D-tracking.............................. 76, 77, 265  
51 points (3D-tracking) ..................... 265  
A
A/V cable ............................................. i, 239  
AC adapter............................................. 352  
Accessories ............................................ 352  
Active D-Lighting ....................... 129, 164  
Active folder.......................................... 256  
Add items (My Menu) ........................ 333  
ADL bracketing ........................... 129, 289  
Adobe RGB............................................. 166  
B
Backlight .......................................... 39, 278  
Backup (Secondary slot function).... 72  
398  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery.............. 22, 24, 37, 279, 280, 307  
Battery info............................................ 307  
Battery order......................................... 280  
Battery pack .............. 279, 280, 307, 352  
Beep......................................................... 275  
Black-and-white (Monochrome).... 322  
Body cap...................................... 5, 26, 355  
Border............................................. 231, 235  
Bracketing........................... 120, 289, 290  
Bracketing order.................................. 290  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ........... 268  
Bulb................................................. 112, 114  
Burst...................................... 186, 276, 293  
Continuous high speed................ 86, 88  
Continuous low speed......... 86, 88, 276  
Continuous release mode ........... 86, 88  
Continuous-servo AF... 74, 81, 263, 264  
Contrast-detect ...................................... 50  
Contrast-detect autofocus ... 48, 50, 51  
Control panel.............................................. 8  
Copy image(s) ....................................... 248  
Copyright...................................... 214, 309  
Copyright information....................... 309  
CPU lens ........................................... 27, 340  
Creative Lighting System........ 347, 348  
Cropping  
(PictBridge [Setup] menu) .............. 231  
Custom setting bank .......................... 262  
Custom Settings................................... 260  
Customize command dials............... 297  
Cyanotype (Monochrome)............... 322  
C
C .......................................... 74, 81, 263, 264  
Camera Control Pro 2................ 224, 355  
Capture NX 2......................... 69, 305, 355  
Center-weighted ........................ 102, 272  
Center-weighted area........................ 272  
Center-weighted metering..... 102, 272  
CF card slot................................. 31, 62, 72  
CF card slot  
D
Date and time ................................ 29, 302  
Date format..................................... 30, 302  
Daylight saving time.................... 29, 302  
DCF version 2.0........................... 167, 392  
Default settings ....... 182, 256, 262, 368  
Delete................................................ 46, 220  
Delete all images.................................. 221  
Delete current image .................. 46, 220  
Depth-of-field ....................................... 105  
Depth-of-field preview  
(Primary slot selection)....................... 72  
Charging the battery ............................ 22  
Choose color temp.  
(White balance)......................... 134, 141  
CL mode shooting speed................. 276  
Clean image sensor............................ 358  
Clock ................................................. 29, 302  
Clock battery............................................ 30  
Cloudy (White balance) .................... 134  
CLS............................................................ 348  
CLS-compatible flash units.............. 348  
Color balance........................................ 323  
Color space............................................ 166  
Color temperature ........... 134, 136, 141  
Commander mode ............................. 285  
CompactFlash................................ 31, 393  
CompactFlash card slot ....................... 31  
Compatible lenses .............................. 340  
Compressed (Type) ............................... 70  
Computer............................................... 224  
Connector for external  
button ................................. 105, 289, 296  
Digital Print Order  
Format....................... 228, 233, 237, 392  
Diopter.............................................. 36, 353  
Diopter adjustment control............... 36  
Direct sunlight (White balance)...... 134  
Display mode ........................................ 247  
D-Lighting .............................................. 319  
DPOF ........................... 228, 233, 237, 392  
Dust off ref photo ................................ 305  
Dynamic AF area.................................. 264  
Dynamic-area AF.................... 76, 77, 264  
E
Easy exposure compensation ......... 271  
microphone....................................... 4, 58  
399  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electronic rangefinder....... 84, 340, 342  
Ethernet......................................... 227, 352  
EV steps for exposure cntrl. ............. 270  
Exif version 2.21.......................... 167, 392  
Exp comp/fine tune............................ 270  
Exposure..................... 101, 102, 116, 118  
Exposure bracketing ....... 120, 289, 290  
Exposure compensation................... 118  
Exposure delay mode........................ 278  
Exposure indicator.............................. 113  
Exposure lock........................................ 116  
Exposure meters........................... 39, 273  
Exposure mode.................................... 104  
Exposure program .............................. 372  
External microphone ..................... 58, 62  
Eye-Fi upload ........................................ 313  
Focal length scale .................................. 26  
Focal plane mark.................................... 84  
Focus ....................... 73, 74, 76, 78, 80, 83  
Focus indicator ................................ 43, 84  
Focus lock ................................................. 80  
Focus mode.............................................. 74  
Focus mode switch................................ 27  
Focus point.............. 50, 76, 78, 264, 267  
Focus point wrap-around ................. 267  
Focus tracking...................... 75, 265, 266  
Focus tracking with lock-on............. 266  
Focusing screen.................................... 386  
Format............................................... 34, 301  
Format memory card.......................... 301  
Frame interval (Slide show).............. 252  
Front-curtain sync ............................... 175  
Full-frame playback............................. 204  
FV lock...................................................... 178  
F
File information.................................... 208  
File naming............................................ 258  
File number sequence....................... 277  
Filter effects........................................... 322  
Filter effects  
G
GPS.................................................. 198, 214  
GPS data.................................................. 214  
GPS unit................................................... 198  
(Set Picture Control) ................ 157, 158  
Fine tune optimal exposure ............ 272  
Firmware version................................. 314  
Flash............................. 171, 175, 177, 178  
Flash (White balance) ........................ 134  
Flash bracketing ............... 120, 289, 290  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash .............. 283  
Flash compensation........................... 177  
Flash control.......................................... 170  
Flash mode ............................................ 175  
Flash only  
(Auto bracketing set)............... 120, 289  
Flash range ............................................ 174  
Flash ready indicator.......... 92, 171, 179  
Flash shutter speed ............................ 282  
Flash sync speed............... 108, 281, 282  
Flash sync terminal............................. 347  
Flexible program ................................. 107  
Fluorescent (White balance) ........... 134  
Fn button .......... 121, 125, 129, 179, 292  
f-number ............................. 109, 110, 341  
Focal length.................................. 195, 344  
H
Hand-held................................................. 52  
HDMI...................................... 241, 302, 392  
HDMI mini-pin connector...................... 4  
Help...................................................... 18, 21  
Hi.................................................................. 97  
Hide image............................................. 245  
High definition................... 241, 302, 392  
High ISO NR............................................ 259  
Highlights ............................................... 209  
Histogram..................................... 210, 211  
I
Image authentication......................... 308  
Image comment................................... 303  
Image Dust Off ref photo.................. 305  
Image file ................................................ 392  
Image overlay........................................ 324  
Image quality .......................................... 68  
Image review............................... 206, 251  
Image size................................................. 71  
400  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Incandescent (White balance)........ 134  
Index print ............................................. 236  
In-focus indicator ............................ 43, 74  
Information .................................. 207, 247  
Information display..................... 12, 278  
Interval timer shooting..................... 189  
ISO sensitivity ............................ 95, 96, 98  
ISO sensitivity auto control................. 98  
ISO sensitivity settings ......................... 97  
ISO sensitivity step value.................. 270  
i-TTL....................................... 170, 171, 285  
i-TTL balanced-fill flash for  
Magenta........................................ 138, 323  
Manage Picture Control .................... 160  
Manual................................ 53, 74, 83, 111  
Manual (Exposure mode).................. 111  
Manual  
(Flash cntrl for built-in flash) .......... 284  
Manual focus............................. 53, 74, 83  
Matrix....................................................... 102  
Matrix metering.................................... 102  
Max. continuous release ................... 276  
Maximum aperture ...................... 84, 195  
Maximum sensitivity ............................ 98  
MB-D10.............. 269, 279, 280, 307, 352  
MB-D10 battery type.......................... 279  
Memory buffer................... 43, 86, 89, 90  
Memory card ........................ 31, 301, 393  
Memory card capacity ....................... 394  
Metering ................................................. 102  
Metering selector.......................... 41, 103  
Microphone .................................. 5, 58, 62  
Minimum aperture....................... 27, 104  
Minimum shutter speed...................... 99  
Mired ........................................................ 139  
Mirror ......................................... 48, 93, 361  
Mirror up................................................... 93  
Mirror up mode ............................... 86, 93  
Modeling flash............................ 105, 289  
Monitor..................... 12, 45, 48, 204, 301  
Monitor cover.......................................... 16  
Monitor off delay ................................. 274  
Monitor pre-flash....................... 170, 179  
Monochrome......................................... 322  
Monochrome  
digital SLR............................................. 170  
J
JPEG ............................................................ 68  
JPEG basic................................................. 68  
JPEG compression.................................. 70  
JPEG fine.................................................... 68  
JPEG normal............................................. 68  
L
L .................................................................... 71  
LAN........................................................... 352  
Language ........................................ 28, 303  
LCD ........................................... 39, 278, 301  
LCD brightness..................................... 301  
LCD illumination.................................. 278  
Lens......................... 26, 27, 195, 312, 340  
Lens cap..................................................... 26  
Lens distance information ............... 170  
Lens focus ring ................................. 26, 83  
Lens mount ......................................... 5, 27  
Lens mounting index............................ 26  
Lens VR switch......................................... 26  
Live view.............................. 48–56, 57–65  
Live view mode................................ 49, 52  
Lo ................................................................. 97  
Local area network ............................. 352  
Lock mirror up for cleaning............. 361  
Long exp. NR......................................... 258  
Lossless compressed (Type)............... 70  
(Set Picture Control).......................... 154  
Mounting index...................................... 26  
Movie settings......................................... 62  
Movies........................................................ 58  
Multi selector.................................. 19, 292  
Multi selector center button............ 291  
Multiple exposure................................ 184  
My Menu................................................. 333  
N
M
NEF....................................................... 68, 70  
NEF (RAW).......................................... 68, 70  
M........................................... 53, 74, 83, 111  
401  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEF (RAW) bit depth ............................. 70  
NEF (RAW) processing ....................... 327  
NEF (RAW) recording ............................ 70  
Neutral (Set Picture Control) ........... 154  
Nikon Transfer ...................................... 224  
No memory card?................................ 299  
No. of copies  
(PictBridge [Setup] menu).............. 230  
Non-CPU lens............................... 195, 342  
Non-CPU lens data.............................. 195  
Print select.............................................. 233  
Print set (DPOF) .................................... 237  
Printing.................................................... 228  
Programmed auto ............................... 106  
Protecting photographs.................... 219  
Q
Quality (Movie settings) ...................... 62  
R
Rank items (My Menu) ....................... 336  
RAW primary, JPEG secondary  
O
(Secondary slot function).................. 72  
Rear lens cap............................................ 26  
Rear-curtain sync ................................. 175  
Recent settings ..................................... 337  
Rechargeable Li-ion battery.... i, 22, 392  
Red-eye correction.............................. 320  
Red-eye reduction............................... 175  
Release button to use dial ................ 298  
Release mode.......................................... 85  
Release mode dial.................................. 87  
Release mode dial lock release ......... 87  
Remote cord ............................ 51, 93, 356  
Remove items (My Menu)................. 335  
Removing the lens from  
the camera.............................................. 27  
Repeating flash..................................... 284  
Reset...................................... 182, 256, 262  
Reset custom settings........................ 262  
Reset shooting menu ......................... 256  
Resize ....................................................... 329  
Restoring default  
Optimal quality  
(JPEG compression).............................. 70  
Optional flash ....................................... 283  
Overflow  
(Secondary slot function) .................. 72  
Overview data ...................................... 215  
P
Page size........................................ 230, 235  
Phase-detection autofocus ................ 48  
Photo info ..................................... 207, 247  
Photo info/playback........................... 292  
PictBridge...................................... 228, 392  
Picture angle......................................... 346  
Picture Controls ................................... 154  
Playback........................................... 45, 203  
Playback folder..................................... 245  
Playback information................ 207, 247  
Playback menu..................................... 244  
Playback slot and folder.................... 217  
Playback zoom ..................................... 218  
Predictive .................................................. 75  
Predictive focus tracking .............. 74, 75  
Preset manual  
settings ..................... 182, 256, 262, 368  
Retouch menu ...................................... 315  
Reverse indicators ............................... 299  
RGB........................................... 68, 166, 210  
RGB Histogram...................................... 210  
Rotate tall................................................ 251  
(White balance)......................... 134, 142  
Press the shutter-release button  
all the way down................................... 44  
Press the shutter-release button  
S
halfway............................. 43, 44, 80, 116  
Primary slot selection ........................... 72  
Print (DPOF)........................................... 233  
Print options  
S.................................................................... 71  
Save/load settings ............................... 310  
Saving camera settings...................... 310  
Screen tips.............................................. 276  
(PictBridge [Setup] menu).............. 230  
402  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SD card slot................................. 32, 62, 72  
SD card slot  
Time................................................... 29, 302  
Time stamp .................................. 231, 235  
Time zone ........................................ 29, 302  
Time zone and date ..................... 29, 302  
Timer ................................................. 91, 189  
Toning (Set Picture Control)... 157, 159  
Trim........................................................... 321  
Tripod......................................................... 49  
Two-button reset ................................. 182  
(Primary slot selection)....................... 72  
SD memory card.................... 32, 72, 393  
Secondary slot function....................... 72  
Self-timer.................................. 86, 91, 273  
Sensitivity.................................... 95, 96, 98  
Sepia (Monochrome)......................... 322  
Set Picture Control.............................. 154  
Setup menu........................................... 300  
Shade (White balance)...................... 134  
Shooting data.................... 212, 213, 214  
Shooting info display......................... 278  
Shooting menu.................................... 253  
Shooting menu bank......................... 254  
Shutter-priority auto.......................... 108  
Shutter-release  
U
Uncompressed (Type).......................... 70  
USB.................................................. 224, 229  
USB cable................................... i, 225, 229  
UTC........................................... 29, 201, 214  
V
Video mode ........................................... 301  
Viewfinder ............... 10, 36, 91, 191, 386  
Viewfinder eyepiece .................... 91, 191  
Viewfinder eyepiece cap......... i, 91, 191  
Viewfinder focus ............................. 36, 83  
Viewfinder grid display...................... 275  
Viewfinder warning display ............. 275  
ViewNX ............................................. 69, 167  
Virtual horizon ............................... 55, 311  
Vivid (Set Picture Control)................. 154  
button...................... 43, 44, 80, 116, 273  
Shutter-release button AE-L............ 273  
Side-by-side comparison ................. 331  
Single-frame ............................................ 86  
Single-point AF................................ 76, 77  
Single-servo AF...................... 74, 80, 264  
Size ....................................................... 62, 71  
Size priority (JPEG compression)...... 70  
Skylight................................................... 322  
Slide show.............................................. 252  
Slot ............................................. 31, 72, 217  
Slow sync ............................................... 175  
Speaker.................................................... 5, 7  
Speedlights ........................................... 347  
Spot.......................................................... 102  
Spot metering ...................................... 102  
sRGB......................................................... 166  
Standard (Set Picture Control)........ 154  
Standard i-TTL flash for  
W
Warm filter.............................................. 322  
WB ................................................... 125, 134  
WB bracketing  
(Auto bracketing set) ..... 125, 129, 289  
White balance ............................. 125, 134  
White balance bracketing................. 125  
Wireless ......................................... 227, 352  
Wireless network........................ 227, 352  
Wireless transmitter.................. 227, 352  
WT-4................................................ 227, 352  
digital SLR............................................. 170  
Start printing ............................... 232, 235  
T
Television ............................ 239, 301, 302  
Ten-pin remote terminal ......... 198, 356  
Thumbnail ............................................. 216  
Thumbnail playback .......................... 216  
TIFF (RGB).................................................. 68  
403  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
404  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Ventilation Hood DA2210 User Manual
Mr Coffee Coffeemaker 110687 User Manual
Navman GPS Receiver ICN 550 User Manual
OK International Water Dispenser TS250 User Manual
Onkyo Car Video System DR 815 User Manual
Onkyo DVD Player DV L55 User Manual
Onkyo Speaker SKW 205 User Manual
Panasonic Portable DVD Player DVD LS855 User Manual
Panasonic Smoke Alarm 2217 User Manual
Panasonic Smoke Alarm 3378 User Manual